JP2019201864A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for further improving a performance effect.SOLUTION: A pseudo winning combination image 96AK020 is displayed from a left-end part of an image display device 5. At this time, the pseudo winning combination image 96AK020 is displayed such that it can be seen to the end from a left-end part of the image display device 5, and the pseudo winning combination image 96AK020 travels in a right-side direction. The pseudo winning combination image 96AK020 travels in a right-side direction while being displayed in this side of hold display and active display (a second hold display area 96AK012, an active display area 96AK013) and a decorative pattern, and disappears to the end to a right side of the image display device 5 as in appearance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 21-3

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine that performs an effect of displaying a pseudo-movable body reminiscent of a movable body using a variable display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-130561 A

  In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Display means for performing display (for example, the image display device 5);
Display control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing control to display an image on the display means,
The display control means includes
The display means can display a first image (for example, a hold display, an active display, a decorative pattern, etc.) and a second image (for example, a fourth pattern, a small pattern, etc.) as images relating to the progress of the game,
A predetermined image (for example, a background image 96AK014, a character image for a notice effect or a reach effect, a decorative pattern, a corresponding display area 96AK010, etc.) and a pseudo-object image (for example, a pseudo-object image 96AK020) are displayed on the display means as an effect image. Can be displayed,
The priority order of the display means is higher in the first image than in the predetermined image, higher in the pseudo-object image than in the first image, and higher in the second image than the pseudo-object image. So that those images can be displayed and
The pseudo actor image can be displayed so as to pass over the first image and not pass over the second image (for example, FIG. 21-3).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The pseudo-object image may be displayed so as to be visible at the end of the display area of the display means (for example, FIGS. 21-3 (B) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
There are a plurality of display means (for example, the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 96AK004),
The predetermined image (for example, the character image 96AK003) may be displayed across the plurality of display means, and the pseudo-object image may not be displayed across the plurality of display means.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
There are a plurality of display means (for example, the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 96AK004),
You may make it display the said pseudo | simulation character image on the said display means which is not inclined with respect to a player among the several said display means (For example, the pseudo | simulation character image 96AK020 is displayed on the image display apparatus 5).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
The pseudo object image may include a pseudo member image (for example, a shaft member image 96AK022).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
You may enable it to perform the vibration operation | movement according to the display operation | movement of the said pseudo | simulation thing image.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
A movable body that can be operated (for example, an accessory 96AK060),
During the operation of the movable body, the pseudo-object image may not be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in production effect.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
An error display (for example, error notification image 96AK005) may be displayed with priority over the pseudo-object image (for example, FIG. 21-5).
According to such a configuration, an error display can be appropriately displayed.

(9) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (8),
A movable body that can be operated (for example, an accessory 96AK060),
The pseudo object image may be an image imitating the movable body (for example, FIGS. 21-3 and 21-6).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(10) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (9),
The display means displays a related display related to a predetermined state (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 for notifying that a big hit effect is being executed) and a specific display (for example, a right-handed instruction image 38SH20). Even when a specific display is displayed overlaid on a related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized (for example, when a right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed over the telop image 38SH10, the telop is displayed). The content of the telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH11 of the image 38SH10).
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

(11) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (10),
An operable movable body (for example, the movable body 32) is provided, and the display means can display a related display related to a predetermined state in a predetermined display area (for example, a pre-read zone effect is being executed). The zone telop image 38SH30 for informing the user can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the movable body is operable at least in the operation position overlapping the predetermined display area. Yes (for example, the movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed), and when the movable body is in the operating position during display of the related display In addition, the contents of the related display can be recognized (for example, when the movable body 32 is in front of the left display area while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed). By moving the character information 38SH31 zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 may choose to, etc.) so as to enable recognition.
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (11) above,
A first display means (for example, the image display device 5) and a second display means (for example, the sub-image display device 38SH5A), and a predetermined state straddling the first display means and the second display means (For example, displaying a zone telop image 38SH30 notifying that the prefetch zone effect is being executed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A). You may do it.
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

(13) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (12),
Specific effect means for executing a specific effect that gives a common change to the plurality of displays displayed on the display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction ratio. The display means can perform a related display related to a predetermined state (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 for notifying that a big hit effect is being executed) An error telop image 38SH90 or the like for notifying that an abnormality is full can be displayed, and as a related display, a first related display that receives a change due to the specific effect (for example, a big hit telop image that receives a change due to a reduction effect) 38SH10) and the second related display that is not affected by the specific effect (for example, an error telop that is not affected by the reduction effect) Image 38SH90 etc.) and may be that capable of displaying.
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

(14) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (13),
Specific effect means for executing a specific effect that gives a common change to the plurality of displays displayed on the display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction ratio. The display means can display a related display related to a predetermined state in a mode with an action (for example, during a big hit effect) For example, displaying the big hit telop image 38SH10 informing the character information 38SH11 in a manner in which the character information 38SH11 moves), and the related display can be displayed in a manner with an action even when the specific effect is changed. (For example, the character information 38SH11 may be displayed in such a manner that the character information 38SH11 moves even when the image blur effect is changed by the execution).
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (63IW). It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding characteristic part 95AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding characteristic part 95AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 96AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 96AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 96AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 96AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the normal game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the normal game based on the pass cannot be immediately executed). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy and high-base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy and high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy and low-base state, and the like. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probable big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common performance is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify the high probability state or the low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, as well as the status of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern and the type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in this embodiment, the non-reach losing fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. , The variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the decorative pattern variable display mode is the reach mode and the display result is “lost”, and the display result is “big hit” Fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8B, in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, the reliability when each reach is executed (the jackpot reliability) is as follows: normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 8A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In FIG. 8A, a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed to a superreach level one level is shown, but a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of super reach production operation in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop and become a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, the entire screen of image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. The super reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP reach A” characters) is displayed, and the speaker 8 outputs the sound corresponding to the reach title name (here “super reach A”). The title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the lines are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9F, the title 31AK005 (here) Is displayed, and the audio corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach B. The Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9G, the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory part until the notification is made, a super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the Super Reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but does not have to be completely coincident with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 9I, the contents of the effects common to those in FIG. 9C (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9J, the enemy character 31AK009 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. The

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of super reach E (here, the letters “SP reach E”) is displayed in a part on the upper left of the image display device 5. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 9D, 9F, 9D). H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super reach when the reach is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. Things (title announcement using the entire screen) or the like may be used. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title announcements with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification, the expectation suggestion display is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in a reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expected level suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), etc., and the expected level may be suggested by a meter or a gauge. The numerical values may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. In addition, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily since any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a decision effect is displayed in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10D, the big hit combination is obtained. A definitive decorative symbol is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  In the example of the production operation shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced and executed in the lower right part of the image display device 5. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in the figure, an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of super reach B is notified, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and sound, title notification by display and sound is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or displays a sandstorm (display that appears to be broken). You may do it. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. Note that there may be a development effect such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), a black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the degree-of-expected indication 31AK008. First, five white stars are displayed step by step. You may make it perform the expectation degree suggestion production which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, first, five white star expectation indications 31AK021 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expected degree suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expected degree suggestion display 31AK021 A performance that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted as shown in FIG. 12F. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level. However, there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are examples of the presentation operation of the title notification and the degree of expectation presentation when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, a title notification and an expectation suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12J and 12K, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted. In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  In FIG. 12, although the example of the production | presentation operation | movement when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated is shown, other reach productions (title notification, expectation suggestion production) by production mode (state when reach production is performed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of performing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level suggestion step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of increasing the number of black stars stepwise is completed, the button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the super reach C title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. The title of reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title or the degree of expectation indication changes may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a notification mode of a title (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, so that the Super Reach A title is notified. Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not a notice effect is executed and an effect aspect. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The thing which changes from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title text is displayed in bold and the text itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the display color of the title at a different rate. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display colors of the lines in the reach production are “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, and are in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. Further, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be varied depending on the type of super reach. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one effect mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the effect aspect changes due to the action effect) may vary depending on the effect mode of the action effect, The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in which color (how many steps) may be different. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect in a different ratio according to production modes. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or the degree of expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (notification that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case where a pre-read zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect) The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Reach with 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and executing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( FIG. 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when the predetermined timing before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), for example, a character 31AK041 that is a friendly character and a character 31AK042 that is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17C to 17F and FIGS. 18G to 18I, a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. To change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when any one of the shutter display and the reach title display is displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the decorative symbol variable display is started as shown in FIG. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach production is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed on the lower right of the screen, and the contents of super reach to be executed from now on are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination related to the shutter effect (whether the shutter effect is present or the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 31AK)
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player. The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the state is controlled, and the title notification means (for example, the effect) capable of notifying the title corresponding to the suggestion effect CPU 120 for control), and the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). ).

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1), the suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and in the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period. May be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), at a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, a specific effect (for example, an expansion effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state. Execution is possible, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

  (4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the suggestion effect execution means includes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and the first as the suggestion effect. 2 suggestion effects (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) can be executed, and the title notification means is the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect. You may make it alert | report the title corresponding to.

  According to such a configuration, the notification effect of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

  (5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), when the first suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of controlling to the advantageous state is higher than when the second suggestion effect is executed. Also good.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

  (6) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (5), the suggestion effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period. May be.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

  (7) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (6), detection means (for example, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's action and a specific display corresponding to the detection means ( For example, specific display execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that performs a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, and a stick image 31AK051) is further provided, and the specific display execution means uses a first specific display as the specific display. (For example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific display can be displayed and detected by the detection means In the non-valid period, after displaying the first specific indication The first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)), and the operation effect using the changed second specific display in the effective period of detection by the detecting means. May be executed (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

  (8) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (7), a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size as a suggestion display that suggests an expectation degree of control to the advantageous state (FIG. 19). The first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in (a) and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (the display at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19D). Display means (for example, the image display device 5 and the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying two-size reach title images 31AK062, etc., and the display means includes a plurality of types of elements (FIG. 19A) having different modes. , (D) element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc.) An image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) can be displayed, and when displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image , A plurality of types of elements are displayed so as to be included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display (in either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D). May be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

(Explanation 1 regarding the feature 38SH)
Next, the characteristic part 38SH of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game and includes a display unit. The display means can display a related display related to a predetermined state and a specific display. Even when the specific display is displayed over the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized.

  In the following description, the related display will be described by taking a specific telop image as an example for the purpose of preventing the description from becoming complicated. However, the related display is not limited to the illustrated telop image, and can be applied to various telop images related to a predetermined state.

  Here, the telop is an image in which character information moves in a band-like frame display as in the example of the rendering operation shown in FIGS. 20-1 to 20-43 in a narrow sense. Only character information is displayed without a frame display. The telop in a broad sense may be an aspect in which character information moves or an aspect in which character information does not move. Character information is information composed of character strings, characters, symbols, pictograms, etc., for example, information that is displayed for the purpose of giving some notification to the player, or information that presents information related to the production Etc. The character information is not limited to information including actual character strings, characters, symbols, pictograms, and the like, and may include fictitious character strings, characters, symbols, pictograms, and the like.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 20-1 to FIG. 20-43, a telop including character information displayed for the purpose of giving some notification to the player will be mainly described. On the other hand, as an example of a telop that includes character information related to the production, a telop that includes character information indicating the lyrics of the music that is being output when the telop is displayed when the production of outputting the music is being executed. Can be displayed. That is, the character information indicating the lyrics of the music is not displayed for the purpose of informing the player, but is character information related to the production.

(Example 1 of production operations related to the feature 38SH)
FIG. 20A shows an example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH. In this example, as a related display related to a predetermined state, a display of a telop image that notifies that a big hit effect is being executed will be described as an example. Further, in this example, as a specific display, a display of a right-handed instruction image for instructing to fire a game ball toward the right game area will be described as an example.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display, on the image display device 5, a telop image that notifies that the effect during the big hit is being executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20A, the effect control CPU 120 displays a big hit telop image 38SH10 extending in the left-right direction in the upper area of the display area of the image display device 5. The big hit telop image 38SH10 is an image in which character information 38SH11 of “LIVE BONUS” is displayed. In this example, the fact that the character information 38SH11 of “LIVE BONUS” of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is recognizable is informed that the big hit effect is being executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display a right-handed instruction image on the image display device 5 for instructing to fire a game ball toward the right game area. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 in the upper right area of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is an image in which the character information “right-handed” and the arrow “→” are alternately displayed so as to form a ring and rotate clockwise. In this example, a right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed to instruct to fire a game ball toward the right game area.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 on the condition that the big hit effect is being executed. Further, for example, when it is detected that a game ball is being emitted toward the left game area in spite of the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed instruction image 38SH20. . Therefore, when it is detected that a game ball is being fired toward the left game area in spite of the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the right hit instruction image 38SH20 Will be displayed at the same time.

  Here, display priority is set for each of the plurality of images displayed on the image display device 5. When the plurality of images with different display priorities are displayed in an overlapping manner, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image with a higher display priority on the front of an image with a lower display priority than that image. In this example, it is assumed that the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 has a higher display priority than the big hit telop image 38SH10. In this case, the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed so as to overlap the front of the big hit telop image 38SH10. Therefore, the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. The contents of the image 38SH10 may be difficult or impossible to recognize. In the example shown in FIG. 20A, a part of the character string “BONUS” of the character string “LIVE BONUS” is hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and becomes difficult to recognize, and the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 are recognized. It has become difficult. In this way, when part or all of the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is difficult to recognize or cannot be recognized, the fact that the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is being executed during the big hit telop is informed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize.

  Therefore, in this example, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10. In the example shown in FIG. 20-1, by moving the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 from the right side to the left side from the state shown in FIG. 20-1 (A), as shown in FIG. 20-1 (B), All of the character strings “LIVE BONUS” are moved to a position that is not hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and can be recognized, and the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is informed that the big hit effect is being executed. Can be recognized.

  When the character information 38SH11 reaches the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, it is not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH11 is no longer displayed as a result of moving the character information 38SH11 from the right side to the left side, the effect control CPU 120 moves the character information 38SH11 from the right side to the left side of the display area of the image display device 5. Display again to move.

  The display position of the telop image such as the big hit telop image 38SH10 may be any position in the display area of the image display device 5 as long as the visibility of the big hit effect and the variable display effect is not hindered. . For example, the effect control CPU 120 can display a telop image extending vertically in the right or left area of the display area of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 can display a telop image extending in an oblique direction.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 20-1, the big hit telop image 38SH10 for notifying that the big hit effect is being executed and the right hit instruction image 38SH20 can be displayed, and the big hit telop image 38SH10 is right hit. Even when the instruction image 38SH20 is displayed in an overlapping manner, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10.

(Example 2 of production operations relating to the characteristic portion 38SH)
FIG. 20-2 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  In this example, even if it is difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 from one character information by displaying a plurality of the same character information as "LIVE BONUS" on the big hit telop image 38SH10, The contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized from a plurality of pieces of the same character information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-2 (A), two character information 38SH111 and character information 38SH112 of “LIVE BONUS” are displayed on the big hit telop image 38SH10. The character information 38SH111 has a character string “LIVE”. A part of the image display device 5 is cut out of the display area of the image display device 5, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 from the character information 38SH111. Further, a part of the character string “BONUS” is hidden in the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 in the character information 38SH112, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 from the character information 38SH112. However, some recognizable characters of the character string “LIVE” in the character information 38SH111, a recognizable character string “BONUS” in the character information 38SH111, and a recognizable character string “LIVE” in the character information 38SH112. And, according to some characters that can be recognized in the character string “BONUS” of the character information 38SH112, it is possible to recognize that the character information “Live BONUS” is displayed in the jackpot telop image 38SH10. It becomes possible to recognize that the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is a notification that the effect during the big hit is being executed.

  Also in this example, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be more easily recognized by moving the character information 38SH111 and the character information 38SH112 of the big hit telop image 38SH10. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, the character information 38SH111 and the character information 38SH112 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 are moved from the right side to the left side from the state shown in FIG. As shown, the recognizable range of the character string “LIVE” in the character information 38SH111 and the recognizable range of the character string “BONUS” in the character information 38SH112 are different. That is, by moving the character information 38SH111 and the character information 38SH112, the range of character strings that can be recognized in each character information is changed, so that the character information does not move and the characters that are difficult to recognize or cannot be recognized are unchanged. Compared to a certain case, it is possible to more easily recognize that the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 notifies that the big hit effect is being executed.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 20B, the big hit telop image 38SH10 for notifying that the big hit effect is being executed and the right hit instruction image 38SH20 can be displayed, and the big hit telop image 38SH10 is right hit. Even when the instruction image 38SH20 is displayed in an overlapping manner, the content of the telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by displaying a plurality of the same character information on the big hit telop image 38SH10.

(Example 3 of production operations related to the feature 38SH)
FIG. 20-3 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can output the jackpot music related to the jackpot effect executed in the jackpot gaming state from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, the production control CPU 120 executes a live production in which a character performs a song or dance as a big hit effect, and outputs a song corresponding to the song or dance as a big hit song.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 can output different types of jackpot songs in accordance with the jackpot type. In the case of such an aspect, the music performed in the live performance executed as the big hit effect may be made different according to the big hit type. According to such an aspect, the player who has listened to the music during the jackpot can easily recognize which jackpot type of the jackpot gaming state.

  For example, the music in the big hit may be different for the case of “probable big hit” and the case of “non-probable big hit”. In particular, in the case of “probable big hit”, by adopting an impressive intro song as a big hit middle piece, there is a definite decorative pattern that becomes a big hit combination in response to the start of the big hit gaming state. If the music for the big hit is output in response to the derivation, the interest can be enhanced at a stroke from the start of the big hit gaming state or when a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is derived.

  In addition, when a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved as a big hit performance, a big hit middle song corresponding to “non-probable big hit” is adopted as the big hit middle song. At the start of the gaming state or when a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived, it is only necessary not to notify that the jackpot type is “probable jackpot”. In such a case, in response to execution of the promotion effect as a big hit performance, the big hit middle song is changed from the big hit middle song corresponding to “non-probable big hit” to the big hit middle song corresponding to “probable big hit”. You may make it change to. At that time, when outputting the music for the big hit corresponding to the “probable big hit”, the music may be output from the intro of the music or may be output from the chorus part of the music. According to such an aspect, the effect of improving the player's interest by the promotion effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 can output right-handed instruction voices for instructing to fire a game ball toward the right game area from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound such as “Aim at the right” as a right-handed instruction sound.

  For example, the performance control CPU 120 outputs a jackpot song on condition that the jackpot effect is being executed. Further, for example, when it is detected that a game ball is being emitted toward the left game area in spite of the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a right-handed instruction sound. Therefore, when it is detected that a game ball is being fired toward the left game area in spite of being in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously plays the big hit hit music and the right-handed instruction voice. Will be output. In that case, there is a possibility that both the jackpot music and the right-handed instruction voice are difficult or impossible to recognize.

  In addition, as described above, when it is detected that a game ball is being launched toward the game area on the left side in spite of the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the right The hitting instruction image 38SH20 is displayed at the same time, but the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is hidden by the right hitting instruction image 38SH20 and becomes difficult or impossible to recognize, and the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 are difficult to recognize or unrecognizable. It may become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-3 (A), the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is not hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20, so that the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is being executed during the big hit effect. Can be visually recognized. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 makes the right-handed instruction sound easier to recognize auditorially, for example, by making the right-handed instruction sound volume louder than the volume of the big hit middle tune. Here, in order to increase the volume of the right-handed instruction voice to be higher than the volume of the big-hit music, the volume of the right-hit music is increased by lowering the volume of the right-hit music and the volume of the right-hit music is reduced. There are a method of not increasing the volume of the strike instruction voice and a method of increasing the volume of the right strike instruction voice without lowering the volume of the music during the big hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-3 (B), a part of the character string “BONUS” of the character string “LIVE BONUS” is hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and is difficult to recognize, and the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 are visually recognized. Recognition is difficult. Therefore, in this example, the volume of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is produced during the big hit by making the volume of the big hit hit music easier than the volume of the right hit instruction voice, for example, by making the hit big hit song easier to hear. It is possible to recognize that it is a notification that it is being executed. Here, in order to increase the volume of the jackpot music while making it louder than the volume of the right hit instruction voice, the volume of the right hit instruction voice is increased by lowering the volume of the right hit instruction voice, and the volume of the right hit instruction voice is decreased. There are a method of not increasing the volume of the music during the big hit and a method of increasing the volume of the music during the big hit without lowering the volume of the right-handed instruction voice.

  The effect control CPU 120 can specify the position of the character information 38SH11 based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the display of the big hit telop image 38SH10, for example. Therefore, when displaying the right-handed instruction image 38SH20, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the character information 38SH11 is right-handed based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the start of the display of the big hit telop image 38SH10. It can be determined whether or not the image 38SH20 is hidden.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 20-3, the big hit telop image 38SH10 for notifying that the big hit effect is being executed and the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 can be displayed, and the right-handed instruction is given to the telop image 38SH10. Even when the image 38SH20 is displayed in an overlapping manner, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by adjusting the volume of the big hit song and the right strike instruction voice.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state by outputting, for example, a sound “LIVE BONUS” from the speakers 8L and 8R. When such an aspect is adopted, it is visually recognized that the content of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is to notify that the effect during the big hit is being executed, as in the example shown in FIG. 20-3 (A). If possible, the volume of the right-handed instruction voice is made larger than the volume of the voice of “LIVE BONUS”, and the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 are visually displayed as shown in FIG. 20-3 (B). If the recognition is difficult, the volume of the voice “Live Bonus” may be set higher than the volume of the right-handed instruction voice. At that time, the volume of the music during the big hit may or may not be changed.

(Explanation 2 regarding the characteristic part 38SH)
In addition, the display unit of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH can display a second related display different from the related display as the specific display that is displayed over the first related display. In addition, even when the second related display is superimposed on the first related display, the contents of the first related display can be recognized.

(Example 4 of production operations relating to the characteristic portion 38SH)
FIG. 20-4 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH. In this example, a display of a telop image that notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being executed will be described as an example of the first related display. Also, in this example, a display of a telop image that teaches a point of interest of a prefetch zone effect will be described as an example of the second related display.

  As described above, the prefetch zone effect is an effect of shifting to a plurality of zones having different background images and effect modes. The CPU 120 for effect control becomes super reach or display in the variable display of the target corresponding to the hold information subject to the prefetch determination based on the determination result of the start winning occurrence, the number of stored memories, the prefetch determination and the like. It is possible to execute a pre-reading zone effect informing that the result will be a “big hit”. The effect control CPU 120 can execute the prefetch zone effect over a plurality of variable displays executed before the target variable display including the target variable display.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display, on the image display device 5, a telop image notifying that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 extending vertically in the right region of the display region of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The zone telop image 38SH30 is an image in which character information 38SH31 of “LIVE ZONE” is displayed. In this example, the fact that the pre-read zone effect is being executed is notified by the fact that the character information 38SH31 of “LIVE ZONE” in the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display a telop image that teaches the point of interest of the prefetch zone effect on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 20D, the effect control CPU 120 displays the attention point telop image 38SH40 in a lower area in the display area of the image display device 5. The point-of-interest telop image 38SH40 is an image in which character information 38SH41 indicating “focus on members of the center!” Is displayed. In this example, as a pre-reading zone effect, a live effect in which a plurality of characters perform a song or dance is performed, and depending on which character is located at the center at the timing of the chorus of the music, the pre-reading zone effect is performed. The expectation degree of jackpot of the variable display that is subject to the notice is different. In this example, the point of interest of the pre-read zone effect is taught by recognizing the character information 38SH41 of “focus on members of the center!” In the point of interest telop image 38SH40.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 on the condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the attention point telop image 38SH40 on the condition that the music of the live effect executed as the prefetch zone effect shifts to the chorus, for example. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 and the point of interest telop image 38SH40 at the same time when the live effect music executed as the pre-read zone effect shifts to the chorus.

  In this example, it is assumed that the point of interest telop image 38SH40 has a higher display priority than the zone telop image 38SH30. In this case, since the point-of-view telop image 38SH40 is displayed so as to overlap the front of the zone telop image 38SH30, the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is hidden behind the point-of-interest point telop image 38SH40, making recognition difficult or impossible. The contents of the image 38SH30 may be difficult or impossible to recognize. In the example shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), a part of the character string “ZONE” of the character string “LIVE ZONE” is hidden behind the target point telop image 38SH40, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is recognized. It has become difficult. As described above, when a part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult to recognize or cannot be recognized, it is recognized that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 notify the execution of the pre-read zone effect. Difficult or unrecognizable.

  Therefore, in this example, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30. In the example shown in FIG. 20-4, by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the lower side to the upper side from the state shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B). , “LIVE ZONE” can be recognized by moving to a position that is not hidden by the point-of-view telop image 38SH40, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is used to notify that the pre-read zone effect is being executed. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that when the character information 38SH31 reaches the upper end of the display area of the image display device 5, it is not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the lower side to the upper side, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character information 38SH31 from the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5. Display again to move up.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-4, the zone telop image 38SH30 that notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being executed and the attention point telop image 38SH40 that teaches the attention point of the prefetch zone effect can be displayed. Yes, even when the point-of-view telop image 38SH40 is displayed over the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30.

(Example 5 of production operations related to the characteristic part 38SH)
FIG. 20-5 illustrates another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  In this example, even if it is difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from a single character information by displaying a plurality of the same character information “Live Zone” on the zone telop image 38SH30, The contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized from a plurality of the same character information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), two character information 38SH311 and character information 38SH312 “Live Zone” are displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30. The character information 38SH311 has a character string “LIVE”. A part of the image display device 5 is cut out of the display area of the image display device 5, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the character information 38SH311. Further, in the character information 38SH312, a part of the character string "ZONE" is hidden behind the attention point telop image 38SH40, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the character information 38SH312. However, a part of the recognizable character string “LIVE” in the character information 38SH311, a recognizable character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH311, and a recognizable character string “LIVE” in the character information 38SH312. And the recognizable character part of the character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH312 can recognize that the character information “Live ZONE” is displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30. It becomes possible to recognize that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is a notification that the pre-read zone effect is being executed.

  Also in this example, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be more easily recognized by moving the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30. In the example shown in FIG. 20-5, the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are moved from the lower side to the upper side from the state shown in FIG. ), The recognizable range of the character string “Live” in the character information 38SH311 and the recognizable range of the character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH312 are different. That is, by moving the character information 38SH 311 and the character information 38SH 312, the range of character strings that can be recognized in each character information changes, so that the character information does not move and the characters that are difficult to recognize or cannot be recognized are unchanged. Compared to a certain case, it is possible to more easily recognize that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 notify that the prefetch zone effect is being executed.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-5, the zone telop image 38SH30 that notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being executed and the attention point telop image 38SH40 that teaches the attention point of the prefetch zone effect can be displayed. In addition, even when the target point telop image 38SH40 is displayed over the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by displaying a plurality of the same character information in the zone telop image 38SH30.

(Example 6 of the production operation regarding the characteristic portion 38SH)
FIG. 20-6 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect by the telop as the pre-reading notice effect based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. As an example, the CPU 120 for effect control can output zone music related to the pre-read zone effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a song corresponding to a song or dance of a live effect executed as a prefetch zone effect as a zone song.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of pre-reading zone effects with different jackpot expectations, and can output different types of zone music according to the types of the pre-reading zone effects. In such an aspect, the music performed in the live performance executed as the prefetch zone effect may be made different according to the type of the prefetch zone effect. According to such an aspect, it is possible to make the player who has listened to the zone music easily recognize the expected degree of jackpot.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can output the point-of-interest voice that teaches the point of interest of the prefetch zone effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a voice “attention to members of the center” as the point of interest voice.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the zone music on condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the point-of-interest sound on condition that the live effect music being executed as the pre-read zone effect shifts to chorus, for example. Accordingly, when the live effect music executed as the pre-read zone effect shifts to chorus, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the zone music and the point of interest sound at the same time. In that case, there is a possibility that both the zone music and the point-of-interest voice may be difficult or impossible to recognize.

  In addition, as described above, the production control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 and the point-of-interest telop image 38SH40 at the same time when the live production music executed as the pre-reading zone production shifts to the chorus. The character information 38SH31 of the telop image 38SH30 may be hidden or unrecognizable because it is hidden behind the target point telop image 38SH40, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 may be difficult or unrecognizable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), since the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is not hidden behind the point-of-interest point telop image 38SH40, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. It can be visually recognized. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 makes it easier to aurally recognize the point of interest sound by increasing the volume of the point of interest sound than the volume of the zone music. Here, in order to increase the volume of the point of interest audio above the volume of the zone music, a method of lowering the volume of the zone music and increasing the volume of the point of interest audio, There are a method of not increasing the volume and a method of increasing the volume of the attention point sound without decreasing the volume of the zone music.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), a part of the character string “ZONE” of the character string “LIVE ZONE” is hidden behind the attention point telop image 38SH40, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are visually recognized. Recognition is difficult. Therefore, in this example, by making the volume of the zone music larger than the volume of the point-of-interest voice to make it easier to recognize the zone music audibly, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH40 are being executed in the pre-read zone effect. Can be recognized. Here, in order to increase the volume of the zone music more than the volume of the point of interest audio, the volume of the zone music is increased by lowering the volume of the point of interest audio, and the volume of the zone music is decreased by lowering the volume of the point of interest audio. There are a method of not raising the volume and a method of raising the volume of the zone music without lowering the volume of the point of interest voice.

  The effect control CPU 120 can specify the position of the character information 38SH31 based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the display of the zone telop image 38SH30, for example. Therefore, when the attention point telop image 38SH40 is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character information 38SH31 as the attention point telop based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the display of the zone telop image 38SH30 was started. It can be determined whether the image 38SH40 is hidden.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 20-6, the zone telop image 38SH30 that notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being executed and the attention point telop image 38SH40 that teaches the attention point of the prefetch zone effect can be displayed. Yes, even when the attention point telop image 38SH40 is displayed so as to overlap the zone telop image 38SH30, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is adjusted by adjusting the volume of the zone music and the volume of the attention point sound. Can be recognized.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the prefetch zone effect is being executed, for example, by outputting a sound “LIVE ZONE” from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the case of such an aspect, it is visually recognized that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is to notify that the prefetch zone effect is being executed, as in the example shown in FIG. 20-6 (A). If possible, the volume of the point-of-interest voice is made larger than the volume of the voice of “LIVE ZONE”, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are visually recognized as shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). If it is difficult, the volume of the voice “LIVE ZONE” may be made larger than the volume of the point-of-interest voice. At this time, the volume of the zone music may or may not be changed.

(Explanation 3 regarding the characteristic part 38SH)
Further, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH can display the related display in a manner in which the character display moves. The moving speed of the character display in the first related display is different from the moving speed of the character display in the second related display.

(Example 7 of production operations related to the feature 38SH)
20-7 and 20-8 show other examples of the rendering operation relating to the characteristic portion 38SH. In this example, a display of a telop image that notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being executed will be described as an example of the first related display. In this example, the second related display will be described by taking, as an example, the display of a pseudo-continuous telop image that notifies the number of times of variable display resumed by the pseudo-continuous effect.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 a telop image that notifies the number of times of variable display restarted by the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 and 20-8, the effect control CPU 120 displays a pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 extending in the left-right direction in a lower area in the display area of the image display device 5. The pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 is an image in which character information 38SH51 of “NEXT × N (N is the number of times of variable display restarted by the pseudo-continuous effect)” is displayed. In this example, since the character information 38SH51 of “NEXT × N” in the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 can be recognized, the number of variable displays restarted by the pseudo-continuous effect is notified.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 on the condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 on the condition that the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 and the quasi-continuous telop image 38SH50 simultaneously when executing the quasi-continuous effect during the execution of the prefetch zone effect.

  In this way, when displaying telop images related to different states at the same time, the player's attention may diverge and it may not be possible to pay attention to any telop image.

  Therefore, in this example, when telop images related to different states are displayed at the same time, the moving speed of the character information of the telop image is made different depending on which state has a high degree of attention. As an example, based on the technical idea that the higher the moving speed of the text information of the telop image, the more noticeable the player's attention is, and the higher the speed of moving the text information of the telop image related to the state of low attention level. The moving speed of the text information of the telop image related to the high state is increased.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-7, the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 for informing that the number of variable displays restarted by the pseudo-continuous effect is 1 are displayed at the same time. Here, it is assumed that the big hit expectation degree when the number of variable displays restarted by the pseudo-continuous effect is one is lower than the big hit expectation degree due to the execution of the prefetch zone effect. In that case, it can be said that the look-ahead zone effect is a higher attention level than the pseudo-continuous effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 increases the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 with “live zone” in the zone telop image 38SH30, compared to the moving speed of the character information 38SH51 with “NEXT × 1” in the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50. .

(Example of effect operation 8 regarding the characteristic portion 38SH)
In the example shown in FIG. 20-8, the zone telop image 38SH30 and the quasi-continuous telop image 38SH50 informing that the number of times of variable display restarted by the quasi-continuous effect is three are displayed simultaneously. Here, it is assumed that the big hit expectation degree when the number of variable displays restarted by the pseudo-continuous effect is three is higher than the big hit expectation degree due to the execution of the prefetch zone effect. In that case, it can be said that the pseudo-continuous production is a production with a higher degree of attention than the prefetch zone production. Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control makes the moving speed of the character information 38SH51 of “NEXT × 3” of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 faster than the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the “live zone” of the zone telop image 38SH30. .

  For example, based on the technical idea that the character string is easier to read as the moving speed of the character information of the telop image is slower, and therefore it is easier to attract the attention of the player, the movement of the character information of the telop image related to the state of low attention The moving speed of the text information of the telop image related to the state of high attention may be made slower than the speed.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20-7 and 20-8, the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 can be displayed by moving the character information, and the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed. It is possible to make one of the telop images easy to focus on by making the moving speed of the above and the moving speed of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH51 different.

(Example 9 of production operations related to the feature 38SH)
On the other hand, when displaying telop images related to the same state at the same time, there is a case where it is better not to increase attention to any telop image intentionally.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 20-9, when the telop images related to the same state are displayed at the same time, the moving speed of the character information of the telop image is set to the same level. Here, the movement speed of the character information is the same, the actual movement speed may not be exactly the same, and if the player can visually recognize that the movement speed is the same, The movement speeds of each other may be different. For example, if the character information of a large character and the character information of a small character are moved at exactly the same moving speed, the character information of a small character appears behind the character information of a large character due to the illusion. The character information of the characters seems to move fast. Therefore, based on such an illusion, whether the moving speed of both characters is comparable, for example, by slowing the actual moving speed of character information of small characters rather than the actual moving speed of character information of large characters. You may make it look like this. For example, when character information with blur and character information without blur are moved at the same movement speed, the character information of the character without blur is blurred due to the illusion. Since the character information of the character is visible in the back, the character information of the blurred character appears to move quickly. Therefore, based on this illusion, the movement speed of both characters is the same, for example, by slowing the movement speed of the character information of characters that are not blurred. You may make it look like it is.

  For example, as a pre-read zone effect, as shown in FIG. 20-9, a live effect in which a plurality of characters perform a song or dance is performed. Depending on whether or not the expectation level of the variable display jackpot that is subject to the advance notice of the pre-read zone effect is different, the degree of attention of the pre-read zone effect at the timing of the music chorus is the pre-read zone effect at a timing other than the chorus of the music It can be said that the degree of attention is higher. In view of such a technical idea, the effect control CPU 120 may display the zone telop image 38SH30 and the point-of-view telop image 38SH40 related to the same state at the same time, regardless of the timing of the music rust. The live performance music that is being executed as the prefetch zone effect is more subtle than the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 with the “LIVE ZONE” of the zone telop image 38SH30 that is displayed on the condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. It is also possible to increase the moving speed of the character information 38SH41 of “Attention to members of the center!” In the point-of-view telop image 38SH40 displayed on the condition that it shifts to.

  Also, for example, as a pre-read zone effect, a live effect in which a plurality of characters perform a song or dance as shown in FIG. 20-9 is executed. Depending on whether or not the expectation of the jackpot of the variable display that is the subject of advance notice of the prefetch zone effect is different, the degree of attention of the prefetch zone effect when the character with a high jackpot expectation is located in the center is high, It can be said that the degree of attention of the pre-read zone effect when the character with low expectation level is located at the center is low. In view of such a technical idea, the CPU 120 for effect control has a character with a high expectation level for big hits at the center even when the zone telop image 38SH30 and the point-of-interest point telop image 38SH40 related to the same state are displayed simultaneously. In this case, the moving speed of the character information 38SH41 of the attention point telop image 38SH40 that is “focus on members of the center!” Is made faster than the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 that is “live zone” of the zone telop image 38SH30. When a character with a low expectation degree of jackpot is located at the center, the “LIVE ZONE” of the zone telop image 38SH30 is higher than the moving speed of the character information 38SH41 of “Attention to members of the center!” In the point telop image 38SH40. The moving speed of the character information 38SH31 may be increased.

(Example 10 of production operations related to the feature 38SH)
Further, the moving speed of the character display of the related display at a certain timing may be different from the moving speed of the character display of the related display at another timing.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 varies the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 according to the tempo of the music of the live effect executed as the prefetch zone effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-10, the live performance of the music that is the sequel to the slow tempo is performed after the up-tempo rust as the pre-reading zone effect. The scene which carries out the stop display of the fixed decoration symbol used as the display result of the variable display of a symbol is shown. FIG. 20-10 (A) shows a scene at the timing when the up-tempo chorus is started, and FIG. 20-10 (B) shows a scene one second after the start of the up-tempo chorus. FIG. 20-10 (C) shows a scene at the timing when the slow tempo follower is started, and FIG. 20-10 (D) shows a scene one second after the start of the slow tempo follower.

  When the effect control CPU 120 executes such a pre-read zone effect, as shown in FIGS. 20-10 (A) to (B), during the period when the live effect music executed as the pre-read zone effect is chorus, When the tempo of the chorus is up-tempo, the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is made faster than the reference speed. Here, the reference speed is a default speed in which the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is not adjusted. For example, the music such as the prelude of music, A melody, B melody, C melody What is necessary is just to apply when it is a period other than a follower.

  On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 has a slow tempo as shown in FIGS. 20-10 (C) to (D) during the period in which the music of the live production executed as the pre-reading zone production is the follower. Accordingly, the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is made slower than the reference speed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern in synchronization with the timing when the follow-up of the slow tempo ends. Here, the effect control CPU 120 performs the pre-read zone effect based on the length of the pre-read zone effect, the special figure change time, etc. so that the confirmed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the follow-up of the slow tempo ends. What is necessary is just to determine the execution start timing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 20-10 (E1), in the case of stopping and displaying a confirmed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination, the effect control CPU 120 executes a live effect corresponding to No. 1 as a prefetch zone effect, As an effect, a live effect corresponding to No. 2 of this music may be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-10 (E2), in the case where the definite decorative symbol that is a lost combination is stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the pre-reading zone effect by stopping and displaying the definitive decorative symbol. You can do it.

  In addition, after the slow tempo interlude after the first chorus of the song ends and the second A melody or head chorus of the song starts, the effect control CPU 120 displays a display result of variable display of decorative symbols. When the confirmed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the display result is “big hit”, the live effect corresponding to the second piece of the music may be seamlessly executed as the big hit effect. By adopting such a mode, it is possible to greatly improve the expectation that the display result will be “big hit” before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-10, the pre-read zone effect is obtained by changing the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 according to the tempo of the music of the live effect executed as the pre-read zone effect. You can improve your interest.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes another effect together with the display of the telop, the telop whose aspect changes according to the change of the aspect of the other effect and the aspect changes even if the aspect of the other effect changes. Telop not to be displayed.

  As an example, the CPU 120 for effect control includes a telop image in which the moving speed of the character information changes according to a change in the tempo of the music, and a telop image in which the moving speed of the character information does not change even if the tempo of the music changes. Can be displayed. Further, when the CPU 120 for effect control displays a telop in which the display is updated to character information different from the character information being displayed instead of moving the character information, the tempo of the music changes. Thus, it is possible to display a telop image whose character information update timing changes and a telop image whose character information update timing does not change even if the tempo of the music changes.

  As another example, when the CPU for effect control executes the reach effect and derives the definite decorative symbol, for example, the effect speed of the reach effect is changed, such as slowing down the playback speed of the video played in the reach effect. By doing so, it is possible to execute a roaring effect that gives a sense of expectation that a definite decorative symbol that will be a jackpot combination will be derived. In executing the reach effect of such an aspect, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the fact that the playback speed of the moving image is slowed down as a telop as a telop whose aspect changes according to the change of the other effect aspects. It is possible to display a telop image that slows down the movement speed of character information.

  Further, as another example, the CPU 120 for effect control is, for example, text information “HEY!” As a telop whose aspect changes in accordance with the change of other effects. The telop that jumps up, the telop that shakes the display of the character information that says “Strike the button!” According to the shooting sound of the battlefield, and the character information that says “Chance if you win!” According to the striking sound of the fight. It is possible to display a telop whose aspect changes in accordance with a sound effect in another effect such as a telop whose display is distorted.

  Further, as another example, the CPU 120 for effect control responds to a spotlight hitting a character image displayed in a live effect, for example, as a telop whose aspect changes in accordance with a change in another effect aspect. Every time a building is destroyed in a telop that displays a sparkling display of text information such as “Focus on members of the center!” Or in a production display where the giant destroys the building, “Do you want to become a giant?” Other types of text, such as a telop where the text information display is cracked, or a text telop where the text information display “gogogogogo ...” scales or shakes each time the destroyed building collapses in the production display where the giant destroys the building, etc. It is possible to display a telop whose aspect changes in accordance with the display movement in the production.

(Explanation 4 regarding the characteristic part 38SH)
Further, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH can display the related display in different modes before and after the specific effect is displayed during the display of the related display. Even when the specific display is displayed over the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized.

(Example 11 of production operations relating to the feature 38SH)
FIG. 20-11 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays, for example, the big hit telop image 38SH10 on the condition that the big hit effect is being executed. Further, for example, when it is detected that a game ball is being emitted toward the left game area in spite of the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed instruction image 38SH20. .

  FIG. 20-11 (A) is a display example when it is detected that a game ball is being launched toward the right game area in the big hit game state. In the big hit game state, when it is detected that a game ball is being fired toward the right game area, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10, but does not display the right strike instruction image 38SH20. Thus, if the right-handed notification image 38SH20 is not displayed when the big hit telop image 38SH10 is displayed, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized.

  FIG. 20-11 (B) is a display example when it is detected immediately after the situation shown in FIG. 20-11 (A) that a game ball is being launched toward the left game area. When it is detected that a game ball is being fired toward the game area on the left side, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed instruction image 38SH20 on the big hit telop image 38SH10. As described above, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed so as to overlap the big hit telop image 38SH10, it becomes difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10. Therefore, in response to displaying the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 superimposed on the big hit telop image 38SH10, the effect control CPU 120 right-strokes the character information that is hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and is difficult to view or cannot be visually recognized. It is displayed at a position that is not hidden by the instruction image 38SH20. In the example shown in FIG. 20-11 (B), a big hit telop image 38SH10 with a balloon image 38SH60 indicating the character information “Live” that is difficult to view hidden behind the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed. The position where the balloon image 38SH60 is displayed may be a position away from the big hit telop image 38SH10 as long as the position is not hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-11, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed in an overlapping manner during the display of the big hit telop image 38SH10, “Live” is hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and becomes difficult to view. By displaying the big hit telop image 38SH10 in which the balloon image 38SH60 indicating the character information is attached to a position that is not hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10 can be recognized.

(Example 12 of production operations related to the feature 38SH)
FIG. 20-12 (A) shows a display example when it is detected that a game ball is being fired toward the game area on the right side in the big hit game state. In the big hit game state, when it is detected that a game ball is being emitted toward the right game area, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10A, but does not display the right-handed instruction image 38SH20. Thus, when the right-handed notification image 38SH20 is not displayed when the big hit telop image 38SH10A is displayed, the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10A can be recognized.

  FIG. 20-12 (B) is a display example when it is detected immediately after the situation shown in FIG. 20-12 (A) that a game ball is being launched toward the left game area. When it is detected that a game ball is being fired toward the left game area, the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 on the big hit telop image 38SH10A. Thus, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed so as to overlap the big hit telop image 38SH10A, it becomes difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the big hit telop image 38SH10A. Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control displays a plurality of big hit telop images in response to displaying the right hit instruction image 38SH20 on the big hit telop image 38SH10A. In the example shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), the big hit telop image 38SH10B having the same contents is displayed in addition to the big hit telop image 38SH10A in which the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 overlaps.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 20-12, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20B is displayed in an overlapping manner while the big hit telop image 38SH10A is displayed, the big hit telop image 38SH10B having the same contents as the big hit telop image 38SH10A is newly displayed. By doing so, the contents of the big hit telop image can be recognized.

  In addition, when displaying a some telop image, you may change the display mode of each telop image.

(Example 13 of production operations related to the feature 38SH)
In the example shown in FIG. 20-13, when the big hit telop image 38SH10A and the big hit telop image 38SH10B are displayed, the direction in which the character information of each big hit telop image moves is different.

(Example 14 of production operations related to the feature 38SH)
In the example shown in FIG. 20-14, when the big hit telop image 38SH10C, the big hit telop image 38SH10D, and the big hit telop image 38SH10E are displayed, the length of each big hit telop image is different from the extending direction of each big hit telop image. It is

(Example 15 of production operations relating to the characteristic portion 38SH)
In the example shown in FIG. 20-15, when the big hit telop image 38SH10F and the big hit telop image 38SH10G are displayed, the thickness of each big hit telop image is different from the size of the character information of each big hit telop image.

  As described above, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 20-13 to 20-15, when a plurality of telop images are displayed, the display effect of each telop image is changed to enhance the effect, and the effect becomes monotonous. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when such a configuration is applied to display a telop image related to the notice effect, the display mode when a plurality of telop images are displayed may be changed according to the expectation degree of the big hit of the notice effect. Good. For example, if the display effect at the time of displaying a plurality of telop images related to the notice effect is more flashy as the notification effect having a higher degree of jackpot expectation, the display method at the time of displaying a plurality of telop images Accordingly, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the big hit of the notice effect, not only to improve the interest, but also to greatly improve the attention to the telop image.

  Further, the jackpot expectation may be varied depending on the number of telops displayed at the same time, the combination of the types of telops displayed at the same time, and the like.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses either a success notification that notifies a result advantageous to the player as a result of the effect, or a failure notification that does not notify the result advantageous to the player as a pre-effect of the common effect. A specific effect to be executed later can be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display a plurality of telops even during execution of such a specific effect. In such an aspect, the degree of expectation that the success notification is executed as a result of the specific effect may be varied depending on the number of telops displayed at the same time, the combination of the types of telops displayed at the same time, and the like.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display a plurality of different types of telops in the manner as shown in FIGS. 20-13 to 20-15.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can display a plurality of telops having different character information moving speeds and update speeds in a manner as shown in FIGS. 20-13 to 20-15.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 38SH)
(1) A gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game, and includes display means (for example, an image display device 5 or the like), and the display means Can display a related display related to a predetermined state (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 for notifying that a big hit effect is being executed) and a specific display (for example, a right-handed instruction image 38SH20). When the specific display is displayed over the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized (for example, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed over the telop image 38SH10, the telop image 38SH10 is displayed. The content of the telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH11).

  According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the display means is configured to display a second display different from the related display as a specific display displayed over the first related display (for example, the zone telop image 38SH30). Related display (for example, attention point telop image 38SH40 etc.) may be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (2), the display means can display the related display in a manner in which character display (for example, character information 38SH31, character information 38SH51, etc.) moves, The moving speed of the character display may be different from the moving speed of the character display in the second related display (for example, the moving speed of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 and the moving speed of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50). Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

  (4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the display means can display the related display in different modes before and after the specific effect is displayed during the display of the related display. (For example, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed in an overlapping manner during the display of the big hit telop image 38SH10, a balloon image indicating character information “Live” that is hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 and is difficult to visually recognize. The big hit telop image 38SH10 with 38SH60 attached to a position not hidden by the right-handed instruction image 38SH20, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(Explanation 1 regarding the feature 38SH and the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 38SH and the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH and the characteristic portion 31AK is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and can execute a display means and a suggestive effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. A suggestion effect executing means and a title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The title notification means can display a title corresponding to the suggestion effect as a related display related to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect. The display means can display such a related display and a specific display. Even when the specific display is displayed over the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized.

(Explanation 2 regarding the feature 38SH and the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 38SH and the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH and the characteristic portion 31AK is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and can execute a display means and a suggestive effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. A suggestion effect executing means and a title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The title notification means can display a title corresponding to the suggestion effect as a specific display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect. The display means can display such a specific display and a related display related to a predetermined state. Even when the specific display is displayed over the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized.

(Explanation 1 regarding the feature 38SH (39SH) 1)
Next, the characteristic part 38SH (39SH) of this Embodiment is demonstrated. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a display unit and an operable movable body. The display means can display a related display related to a predetermined state in a predetermined display area. The movable body can be moved to an operation position that overlaps at least a predetermined display area. Even when the movable body is in the operating position during the display of the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized.

(Example 1 of the rendering operation relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-16 illustrates an example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, as a related display related to a predetermined state, a display of a telop image that notifies that a pre-read zone effect is being executed will be described as an example.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute a movable body effect that operates the movable body 32 on the front surface of the image display device 5 during execution of the prefetch zone effect. The movable body 32 that operates in such a movable body effect may be retracted to an initial position that does not cover the front surface of the image display device 5 when the movable body effect is not executed. In this example, a movable body effect that operates a movable body 32 that imitates a stick light used by a spectator at a music live will be described as a movable body effect that is executed during the execution of the prefetch zone effect. In this example, by moving the movable body 32 simulating a stick light to the left and right on the front surface of the image display device 5, a part of the image displayed in the display area below the image display device 5 is movable. Hiding in the body 32 makes it difficult or impossible to see.

  Alternatively, the movable body 32 may include LEDs that can emit light in a plurality of colors, and the LED may emit light in a predetermined color when the movable body 32 is operated. Moreover, you may vary the operation speed of the movable body 32 according to the tempo of the music of the live effect performed as a prefetch zone effect.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the vertical direction in the left region of the display area of the image display device 5 on the condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the movable object effect according to the jackpot expectation level of the live effect executed as the prefetch zone effect. Therefore, when it is determined to execute the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed.

  Further, for example, the mode of the movable body effect may be varied according to the big hit expectation of the live effect executed as the prefetch zone effect. For example, the light emission color of the LED built in the movable body 32 is varied according to the expectation level of the big hit of the live effect executed as the pre-read zone effect.

  In addition, for example, when the movable body effect is executed before the climax of the music of the live effect executed as the pre-reading zone effect, the movable body depends on which character is located at the center in the rust of the music You may vary the aspect of production. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 20-16, two movable bodies 32 are regarded as one set, and two sets of four movable bodies 32 are executed. Depending on whether it is located at the center, the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set is varied. In that case, for example, if the favorite color of the character A is “white”, the combination of the light emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set is the light emission color of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set. If the combination is “white” and “white” and the favorite color of the character A is “red” and “green”, the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set is “red” and “ The color combination depends on the character setting of each character, such as “green”. With such a configuration, depending on the color of the movable body 32 in the movable body effect, any character is positioned at the center of the music rust before the climax of the music of the live performance executed as the pre-read zone effect. You can suggest what to do.

  In that case, as shown in FIG. 20-16, the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the movable body 32 on the left side may be different from the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the movable body 32 on the right side. With such a configuration, depending on the color of the movable body 32 in the movable body effect, any character is positioned at the center of the music rust before the climax of the music of the live performance executed as the pre-read zone effect. The possibility of being one of two characters can be suggested as to whether or not, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, for example, the mode of the movable body effect may be changed according to the music of the live effect executed as the prefetch zone effect. For example, the combination of the light emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set is varied according to the music of the live effect executed as the pre-read zone effect. In that case, the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set is, for example, the combination of the emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set if the image color of the music piece A is “purple”. Is set to “purple” and “purple”, and if the image color of song B is “green” and “white”, the combination of the light emission colors of the LEDs of the two movable bodies 32 to be set is “green” and “white”. For example, the color combination that depends on the image of each song. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when a live effect by a specific music with an image color is executed as the pre-read zone effect.

  In that case, when the movable body 32 moves to the front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is hidden by the movable body 32 and is difficult or impossible to recognize. Thus, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 may be difficult or impossible to recognize. In the example shown in FIG. 20-16 (A), a part of the character string “ZONE” of the character string “LIVE ZONE” is hidden by the movable body 32 and is difficult to recognize, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult to recognize. It has become. As described above, when part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult or unrecognizable, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is informed that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize.

  Therefore, in this example, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30. In the example shown in FIG. 20-16, by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the lower side to the upper side from the state shown in FIG. 20-16 (A), as shown in FIG. 20-16 (B). , “LIVE ZONE” is moved to a position that is not hidden by the movable body 32 and can be recognized, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is informed that the pre-read zone effect is being executed. It becomes possible to recognize.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-16, the zone telop image 38SH30 for informing that the prefetch zone effect is being executed can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, and when the movable body 32 is in front of the left display area during the display of the zone telop image 38SH30. In addition, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30.

  In addition, the production control CPU 120 has an operation cycle of the movable body 32 that repeats a specific operation and a cycle in which a specific portion of the character information is displayed at a position hidden by the movable body 32 as the text information of the telop moves. Control may be performed to adjust at least one of the operating speed of the movable body 32 and the moving speed of the text information of the telop so as not to match. According to such control, it is possible to prevent only the same portion of the character information from being hidden by the movable body 32 and becoming difficult or impossible to view.

(Example 2 of production operations relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-17 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  In this example, even if it is difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from a single character information by displaying a plurality of the same character information “Live Zone” on the zone telop image 38SH30, The contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized from a plurality of the same character information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), two character information 38SH311 and character information 38SH312 “Live Zone” are displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30. The image is not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and is cut out, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the character information 38SH311. Further, in the character information 38SH 312, a part of the character string “ZONE” is hidden behind the movable body 32, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38 SH 30 from the character information 38 SH 312. However, a recognizable character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH311, a recognizable character string “LIVE” in the character information 38SH312 and a part of the recognizable character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH312. According to the above, it is possible to recognize that the character information “Live ZONE” is displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30, and to notify that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are being executed in the pre-read zone effect. It becomes possible to recognize that.

  Also in this example, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be more easily recognized by moving the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30. In the example illustrated in FIG. 20-17, the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are moved from the lower side to the upper side from the state illustrated in FIG. ), The recognizable range of the character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH311 and the recognizable range of the character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH312 are different. That is, by moving the character information 38SH 311 and the character information 38SH 312, the range of character strings that can be recognized in each character information changes, so that the character information does not move and the characters that are difficult to recognize or cannot be recognized are unchanged. Compared to a certain case, it is possible to more easily recognize that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being executed.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-17, the zone telop image 38SH30 that notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being executed can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, and when the movable body 32 is in front of the left display area during the display of the zone telop image 38SH30. In addition, by displaying a plurality of the same character information in the zone telop image 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

(Example 3 of the rendering operation relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-18 illustrates another example of the effect operation relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can output the sound corresponding to the movable body corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 from the speakers 8L and 8R during the execution of the movable body effect. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a sound that simulates the cheering of the audience, such as “War”, as the movable body-corresponding sound.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the zone music on condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a movable body-corresponding sound on condition that the movable body effect is being executed. Therefore, when performing the movable body effect during the execution of the prefetch zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the zone music and the movable object-corresponding sound at the same time. In that case, both the zone music and the movable body-corresponding voice may be difficult or impossible to recognize.

  Further, as described above, when performing the movable body effect during the execution of the prefetch zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 while the zone telop image 38SH30 is being displayed, but the characters in the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed. The information 38SH31 may be hidden or unrecognizable by being hidden by the movable body 32, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 may be difficult or unrecognizable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), since the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is not hidden by the movable body 32, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is informed that the pre-read zone effect is being executed. It can be visually recognized. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 makes it easier to aurally recognize the movable body-corresponding sound by increasing the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound than the volume of the zone music. Here, in order to make the volume of the movable body-compatible sound higher than the volume of the zone music, the method of lowering the volume of the zone music and increasing the volume of the movable body-compatible sound, There is a method of not increasing the volume of the sound and a method of increasing the volume of the sound corresponding to the movable body without decreasing the volume of the zone music.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-18 (B), a part of the character string “ZONE” of the character string “LIVE ZONE” is hidden by the movable body 32 and becomes difficult to recognize, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are visually recognized. It has become difficult to recognize. Therefore, in this example, by making the volume of the zone music larger than the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound, and making the zone music easier to be heard audibly, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are executed in the pre-read zone effect. It is possible to recognize that it is a notification of being in the middle. Here, in order to make the volume of the zone music higher than the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound, the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound is decreased to increase the volume of the zone music, and the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound is decreased. There are a method of not increasing the volume of the zone music and a method of increasing the volume of the zone music without lowering the volume of the sound corresponding to the movable body.

  The effect control CPU 120 can specify the position of the character information 38SH31 based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the display of the zone telop image 38SH30, for example. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect, the character information 38SH31 is hidden in the movable body 32 based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the display of the zone telop image 38SH30 was started. Can be determined.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 20-18, the zone telop image 38SH30 that notifies that the pre-read zone effect is being executed can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, and when the movable body 32 is in front of the left display area during the display of the zone telop image 38SH30. In addition, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by adjusting the volume of at least one of the volume of the zone music and the volume of the sound corresponding to the movable body.

(Explanation 2 regarding the feature 38SH (39SH) 2)
Further, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) can display a corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the movable body. Even when the corresponding display is displayed so as to overlap the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized.

(Example 4 of production operations related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-19 illustrates another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 on the image display device 52 during execution of the movable body effect. In this example, when the movable body 32 imitating a stick light is in front of the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image 38 SHE imitating the light of the stick light as a corresponding display. Display around. At that time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect image 38SH in accordance with the operation of the movable body 32 so that the light can be seen around the movable body 32 imitating a stick light.

  When the LED is built in the movable body 32 and the LED is caused to emit light, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image 38SHE having the same color as the emission color of the LED of the movable body 32.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the vertical direction in the left region of the display area of the image display device 5 on the condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image 38SHE on the condition that the movable body effect is being executed, for example. Therefore, when the movable body effect is executed during the execution of the prefetch zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image 38SHE while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed.

  In this case, the movable body 32 moves to the front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, so that the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed around the movable body 32. It may be difficult to recognize or unrecognizable behind the 38SHE, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 may be difficult or unrecognizable. In the example shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), a part of the character string “ZONE” of the character string “LIVE ZONE” is hidden behind the effect image 38SHE, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult to recognize. It has become. As described above, when part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult or unrecognizable, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is informed that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize.

  Therefore, in this example, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30. In the example shown in FIG. 20-19, by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the lower side to the upper side from the state shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B). , “LIVE ZONE” is moved to a position where it is not hidden by the effect image 38SH and can be recognized, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is to notify that the pre-read zone effect is being executed. It becomes possible to recognize.

  20-19, the effect image 38SHE corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 can be displayed, and the zone telop image can be displayed even when the effect image 38SHE is displayed over the zone telop image 38SH30. By moving the character information 38SH31 of 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

(Example 5 of production operations related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-20 illustrates another example of the effect operation relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  In this example, even if it is difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from a single character information by displaying a plurality of the same character information “Live Zone” on the zone telop image 38SH30, The contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized from a plurality of the same character information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), two character information 38SH311 and character information 38SH312 “Live Zone” are displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30, but the character information 38SH311 has a character string “LIVE”. The image is not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and is cut out, and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the character information 38SH311. In addition, a part of the character string “ZONE” is hidden in the effect image 38SHE in the character information 38SH312 and it is difficult to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 from the character information 38SH312. However, a recognizable character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH311, a recognizable character string “LIVE” in the character information 38SH312 and a part of the recognizable character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH312. According to the above, it is possible to recognize that the character information “Live ZONE” is displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30, and to notify that the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are being executed in the pre-read zone effect. It becomes possible to recognize that.

  Also in this example, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be more easily recognized by moving the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30. In the example shown in FIG. 20-20, the character information 38SH311 and the character information 38SH312 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are moved from the lower side to the upper side from the state shown in FIG. ), The recognizable range of the character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH311 and the recognizable range of the character string “ZONE” in the character information 38SH312 are different. That is, by moving the character information 38SH 311 and the character information 38SH 312, the range of character strings that can be recognized in each character information changes, so that the character information does not move and the characters that are difficult to recognize or cannot be recognized are unchanged. Compared to a certain case, it is possible to more easily recognize that the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 notifies that the prefetch zone effect is being executed.

  20-20, the effect image 38SHE corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 can be displayed, and the zone telop image can be displayed even when the effect image 38SHE is displayed over the zone telop image 38SH30. By displaying a plurality of the same character information on 38SH30, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

(Example 6 of production operations relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-21 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the zone music on condition that, for example, the prefetch zone effect is being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a movable body-corresponding sound on condition that the movable body effect is being executed. Therefore, when performing the movable body effect during the execution of the prefetch zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the zone music and the movable object-corresponding sound at the same time. In that case, both the zone music and the movable body-corresponding voice may be difficult or impossible to recognize.

  Also, as described above, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect during the execution of the prefetch zone effect, the effect image 38SHHE is displayed while the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, but the characters of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed. The information 38SH31 is hidden behind the effect image 38SHE, making it difficult or impossible to recognize, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 may be difficult or impossible to recognize.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-21 (A), since the text information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is not hidden by the effect image 38SHE, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is informed that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. It can be visually recognized. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 makes it easier to aurally recognize the movable body-corresponding sound by increasing the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound than the volume of the zone music. Here, in order to make the volume of the movable body-compatible sound higher than the volume of the zone music, the method of lowering the volume of the zone music and increasing the volume of the movable body-compatible sound, There is a method of not increasing the volume of the sound and a method of increasing the volume of the sound corresponding to the movable body without decreasing the volume of the zone music.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-21 (B), a part of the character string “ZONE” of the character string “LIVE ZONE” is hidden behind the effect image 38SHE and becomes difficult to recognize, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are visually recognized. It has become difficult to recognize. Therefore, in this example, by making the volume of the zone music larger than the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound, and making the zone music easier to be heard audibly, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are executed in the pre-read zone effect. It is possible to recognize that it is a notification of being in the middle. Here, in order to make the volume of the zone music higher than the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound, the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound is decreased to increase the volume of the zone music, and the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound is decreased. There are a method of not increasing the volume of the zone music and a method of increasing the volume of the zone music without lowering the volume of the sound corresponding to the movable body.

  The effect control CPU 120 can specify the position of the character information 38SH31 based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the display of the zone telop image 38SH30, for example. Therefore, when displaying the effect image 38SHE, the effect control CPU 120 hides the character information 38SH31 in the effect image 38SHE based on the effect control pattern and the effect time that has elapsed since the display of the zone telop image 38SH30 was started. Can be determined.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-21, the effect image 38SHE corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 can be displayed. Even when the effect image 38SHE is displayed over the zone telop image 38SH30, the zone music is displayed. The content of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by adjusting at least one of the volume and the volume of the movable body-corresponding sound.

(Explanation 3 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH))
In addition, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) includes, as related displays, a first related effect that can be difficult to view by the operation of the movable body, and a second related effect that does not become difficult to view by the operation of the movable body. Can be displayed.

(Example 7 of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-22 illustrates another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display, as related displays related to the same state, a first related effect that can be difficult to view by the operation of the movable body, and a second related effect that does not become difficult to view by the operation of the movable body. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-22, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30A that may be difficult to view due to the operation of the movable body 32 as the first related display, and the movable body 32 as the second related display. The zone telop image 38SH30B that does not become difficult to view due to the operation of is displayed.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30A and the zone telop image 38SH30B on the condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-22 (A), both the zone telop image 38SH30A and the zone telop image 38SH30B are visible. Therefore, it can be recognized that the content of the zone telop image is to notify that the prefetch zone effect is being executed.

  In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the movable object effect according to the jackpot expectation level of the live effect executed as the prefetch zone effect. Therefore, when it is determined to execute the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 during the display of the zone telop image 38SH30A and the zone telop image 38SH30B.

  In that case, the movable body 32 appears in front of the zone telop image 38SH30A displayed in the lower area of the display area of the image display device 5, so that the character information 38SH31A of the zone telop image 38SH30A is hidden behind the movable body 32 and is difficult to recognize. Or the recognition may become impossible, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30A may be difficult or impossible to recognize. In the example shown in FIG. 20-22 (B), a part of the character string “ZONE” of the character string “LIVE ZONE” is hidden by the movable body 32 and is difficult to recognize, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30A is difficult to recognize. It has become. As described above, when part or all of the character information 38SH31A of the zone telop image 38SH30A is difficult or unrecognizable, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30A is informed that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. On the other hand, even in such a situation, since the movable body 32 does not overlap the zone telop image 38SH30B displayed in the upper area of the display area of the image display device 5, the contents of the zone telop image from the zone telop image 38SH30. Can be recognized to notify that the prefetch zone effect is being executed.

  20-22, the zone telop image 38SH30A that can be difficult to view by the operation of the movable body 32 and the zone telop image 38SH30B that is not difficult to view by the operation of the movable body 32 can be displayed. Even when the movable body 32 overlaps the zone telop image 38SH30A and is difficult to recognize or cannot be recognized, since the movable body 32 does not overlap the zone telop image 38SH30B, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30B can be recognized.

(Example of effect operation 8 regarding the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-23 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 can display, as related displays related to different states, a first related display that can be difficult to see by the operation of the movable body 32 and a second related effect that is not difficult to view by the operation of the movable body 32. is there. For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-23, the production control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 that may be difficult to view due to the operation of the movable body 32 as the first related display, and the movable body 32 as the second related display. The pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 that does not become difficult to view due to the operation is displayed.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 on the condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 on the condition that the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), both the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 are visible. Therefore, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is informed that the pre-read zone effect is being executed, and the content of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 is informed of the number of variable displays restarted by the pseudo-continuous effect. Can be recognized.

  In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the movable object effect according to the jackpot expectation level of the live effect executed as the prefetch zone effect. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 may operate the movable body 32 during the display of the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50.

  In that case, the movable body 32 appears in front of the zone telop image 38SH30 displayed in the right region of the display area of the image display device 5 so that the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is hidden behind the movable body 32 and recognized. It may be difficult or unrecognizable, and the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 may be difficult or unrecognizable. In the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (B), a part of the character string “ZONE” of the character string “LIVE ZONE” is hidden by the movable body 32 and is difficult to recognize, and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult to recognize. It has become. As described above, when part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult or unrecognizable, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is informed that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. On the other hand, even in such a situation, since the movable body 32 does not overlap the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 displayed in the upper area of the display area of the image display device 5, the content of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 is simulated. It can be recognized that the number of variable displays restarted by the continuous performance is notified.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-23, the zone telop image 38SH30 that can be difficult to view by the operation of the movable body 32 and the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 that is not difficult to view by the operation of the movable body 32 can be displayed. Even when the movable object 32 overlaps the zone telop image 38SH30 and is difficult or impossible to recognize, the movable object 32 does not overlap the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50, so the contents of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 can be recognized. is there.

(Example 9 of production operations related to the characteristic part 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-24 illustrates another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), both the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 are visible. Therefore, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is informed that the pre-read zone effect is being executed, and the content of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 is informed of the number of variable displays restarted by the pseudo-continuous effect. Can be recognized.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 20-24A, the zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the vertical direction is displayed in the right region in the display region of the image display device 5, and the pseudo-continuous telop extending in the horizontal direction in the lower region. When the image 38SH50 is displayed, when the movable body 32 appears, both the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 and the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 are hidden by the movable body 32 and are difficult or impossible to recognize. Thus, the contents of both the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 may be difficult or impossible to recognize.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-24 (B), it is difficult to recognize a part of the character string “ZONE” of the character string “LIVE ZONE” because it is hidden by the movable body 32 and the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult to recognize. It has become. As described above, when part or all of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 is difficult or unrecognizable, the content of the zone telop image 38SH30 is informed that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. It becomes difficult or impossible to recognize.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B), the effect control CPU 120 hides the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 in accordance with the appearance of the movable body 32, and displays the contents of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50. In order to display the pseudo continuous notification image 38SH70 that notifies the number of times of variable display restarted by the pseudo continuous effect, according to the pseudo continuous notification image 38SH70, the content is the same as the content of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 that is not displayed. The contents can be recognized.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-24, the zone telop image 38SH30, which may be difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the movable body 32, is hidden in response to the appearance of the movable body 32. As a result, the operation of the movable body 32 is performed. Can display the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 that does not become difficult to visually recognize, and displays the pseudo-continuous notification image 38SH70 that informs the number of variable displays restarted by the pseudo-continuous rendering, which is the content of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the same content as the content of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 that has not been displayed.

(Explanation 4 regarding the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
Further, the display means of the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) can display the related display in different modes before and after the movable body moves to the operating position during execution of the related display.

(Example 10 of production operations related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-25 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH). In this example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 in a lower area in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, on the condition that the prefetch zone effect is being executed. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the movable body effect according to the jackpot expectation level of the live effect executed as the pre-read zone effect. The movable body 32 is operated during the display of the image 38SH30.

  FIG. 20-25 (A) is a display example when the movable body effect is not started during the execution of the prefetch zone effect. When the movable body effect is not started during the execution of the prefetch zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30, but does not operate the movable body 32. Thus, when the movable body 32 does not operate when the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.

  FIG. 20-25 (B) is a display example when the movable body effect is started immediately after the situation shown in FIG. 20-25 (A). When executing the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30 displayed in the lower area of the display area of the image display device 5. Thus, when the movable body 32 is operated in front of the zone telop image 38SH30, it becomes difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 causes the movable body 32 to display character information 38SH31 that is hidden by the movable body 32 and is difficult to view or cannot be visually recognized by operating the movable body 32 in front of the zone telop image 38SH30. Display in a non-hidden position. In the example shown in FIG. 20-25 (B), a zone telop image 38SH30 with a mini-character image 38SH80 for notifying the character information 38SH31 of “Live ZONE” that is hidden behind the movable body 32 and difficult to view is displayed. Note that the position where the mini character image 38SH80 is displayed may be away from the zone telop image 38SH30 as long as the position is not hidden by the movable body 32.

In this way, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-25, when the movable body 32 is operated in front of the zone telop image 38SH30, the character information 38SH31 of “Live ZONE” that is hidden behind the movable body 32 and is difficult to see is notified. By displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 with the mini character image 38SH80 to be displayed, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized.
(Example 11 of production operations relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH))
FIG. 20-26 (A) shows a display example when the movable body effect is not started during the execution of the prefetch zone effect. When the movable body effect is not started during the execution of the pre-read zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30A, but does not operate the movable body 32. Thus, when the movable body 32 does not operate when the zone telop image 38SH30A is displayed, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30A can be recognized.

  FIG. 20-26 (B) is a display example when the movable body effect is started immediately after the situation shown in FIG. 20-25 (A). When executing the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 32 on the front surface of the zone telop image 38SH30A displayed in the lower area of the display area of the image display device 5. As described above, when the movable body 32 is operated in front of the zone telop image 38SH30A, it becomes difficult or impossible to recognize the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30A. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of zone telop images in response to operating the movable body 32 in front of the zone telop image 38SH30A. In the example shown in FIG. 20-26 (B), the zone telop image 38SH30B having the same contents is displayed in addition to the zone telop image 38SH30A on which the movable body 32 overlaps.

  20-26, when the movable body 32 is operated in front of the zone telop image 38SH30A, the zone telop image 38SH30B having the same content as the zone telop image 38SH30A is newly displayed. The contents of the telop image can be recognized.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 38SH (39SH))
(1) A gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game, and a display unit (for example, an image display device 5 or the like) and an operation A movable body (for example, the movable body 32) that can be displayed, and the display unit can display a related display related to a predetermined state in a predetermined display area (for example, a pre-read zone effect is being executed). The zone telop image 38SH30 for informing the user can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the movable body is operable at least in the operation position overlapping the predetermined display area. Yes (for example, the movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the display area on the left side where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed). The contents of the related display can be recognized even when the moving body is in the operating position (for example, the zone telop even when the movable body 32 is in front of the left display area during the display of the zone telop image 38SH30). The content of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the image 38SH30).

  According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the display means can display a corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect image 38SHE etc.), and displays the corresponding display superimposed on the related display. In this case, the contents of the related display can be recognized (for example, even when the effect image 38SHE is displayed over the zone telop image 38SH30, the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be moved to move the zone information. The contents of the telop image 38SH30 can be recognized).

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the display means, as a related display, a first related effect (for example, zone telop image 38SH30A, etc.) that can be difficult to see by the operation of the movable body, It is possible to display a second related effect (for example, zone telop image 38SH30B or the like) that does not become difficult to view due to the operation of the movable body.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the display unit displays the related information in different modes before and after the movable body moves to the operating position during execution of the related display. (For example, when the movable body 32 is operated in front of the zone telop image 38SH30, a mini character image 38SH80 for notifying the character information 38SH31 of “LIVE ZONE” which is hidden behind the movable body 32 and is difficult to visually recognize is displayed. Display the attached zone telop image 38SH30).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic portion 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic portion 31AK is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is controlled in the advantageous state by a display means, an operable movable body. Suggesting effect executing means capable of executing the suggesting effect, and title notifying means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggesting effect. The title notification means can display a title corresponding to the suggestion effect in a predetermined display area as a related display related to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggestion effect. The movable body can be moved to an operation position that overlaps at least a predetermined display area. Even when the movable body is in the operating position during the display of the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized.

(Explanation 1 regarding the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
Next, the characteristic part 38SH (40SH) of this Embodiment is demonstrated. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit, and the first display unit and the second display unit include It is possible to display a related display related to a predetermined state.

  FIG. 20-27 shows an example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH).

(Example 1 of production operations related to the characteristic part 38SH (40SH))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 20-27 (A) includes an image display device 5 as a first display means and a sub-image display device 38SH5A as a second display means.

  The sub image display device 38SH5A is provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 5, for example. The sub-image display device 38SH5A is composed of, for example, an LCD or an organic EL, and displays various effect images. The sub image display device 38SH5A may include a projector and a screen. The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the sub-image display device 38SH5A by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the sub-image display device 38SH5A based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. .

  The effect control CPU 120 spans the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A, and extends in the left-right direction from the right end in the display region of the sub-image display device 38SH5A to the left end in the display region of the image display device 5. Is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to move from the right end to the left side in the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A. When the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A, they are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the sub-image display device 38SH5A as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right side to the left side on the sub-image display device 38SH5A, the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-image display device. The characters of the character information 38SH31 that are no longer displayed on the 38SH5A are displayed so as to move from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left side. Then, when the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, they are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the image display device 5 as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right side to the left side on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image information on the image display device 5. The character information 38SH31 that is no longer displayed is displayed again so as to be moved from the right end to the left side of the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A.

  Note that the sub image display device 38SH5A may not always be provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 5. For example, the sub image display device 38SH5A is provided at a position different from the right side of the image display device 5, and moves so as to line up on the right side of the image display device 5 in accordance with execution of a predetermined effect such as a prefetch zone effect. It may be a thing.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-27 (A), the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A are provided, and the pre-read zone effect is provided across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. By displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 informing that it is being executed, a suitable display can be performed by the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A.

(Production operation example 2 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the example shown in FIG. 20-27 (B) includes an image display device 5 as a first display means and a dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B as a second display means.

  The dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B is provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 5, for example. The dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B is a dot matrix type display in which LEDs are arranged in a two-dimensional array. For example, cathodes are connected in columns and anodes are connected in rows. The effect control CPU 120 designates a row and a column and designates a current to flow, thereby individually lighting each LED. By designating a column and a row by a raster scan method, the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B. Various effect images are displayed on the screen. The display control unit 123 supplies an effect image to the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B based on an instruction to execute the effect from the effect control CPU 120. Display.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the brightness of individual dots by changing the number of pulses for each LED. A full color display can be realized by using RGB color LEDs in the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B. If OLED is used instead of LED, dots smaller than LED can be formed.

  The effect control CPU 120 spans the image display device 5 and the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B, and extends in the left-right direction from the right end in the display region of the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B to the left end in the display region of the image display device 5. The image 38SH30 is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to move from the right end to the left side in the display area of the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B. When the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B, they are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B as a result of the character information 38SH31 being moved from the right side to the left side by the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B, the effect control CPU 120 displays the dot matrix. The character information 38SH31 that is no longer displayed on the LED display device 38SH5B is displayed so as to move from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left side. Then, when the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, they are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the image display device 5 as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right side to the left side on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image information on the image display device 5. The character information 38SH31 that is no longer displayed is displayed again so as to move from the right end to the left side of the display area of the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B.

The dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B may not always be provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 5. For example, the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B is provided at a position different from the right side of the image display device 5, and moves so as to line up on the right side of the image display device 5 in response to executing a predetermined effect such as a prefetch zone effect. You may do.
As described above, the example shown in FIG. 20-27 (B) includes the image display device 5 and the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B, and spans the image display device 5 and the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B. By displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 informing that the effect is being executed, it is possible to perform suitable display by the image display device 5 and the dot matrix LED display device 38SH5B.

(Example 3 of the rendering operation relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the example shown in FIG. 20-27 (C) includes an image display device 5 as a first display means and a versatile writer 38SH5C as a second display means.

  The versatile lighter 38SH5C is a display device that uses the afterimage effect of human eyes. The versatile lighter 38SH5C uses various after-effects of LED light generated by rotating the plate 38SH5C1 while blinking a plurality of LEDs arranged on the long side surface of the plate 38SH5C1 in a short cycle according to a specific pattern. Display an image.

  The display control unit 123 performs rotation control of the versatile lighter 38SH5C and LED lighting control by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the versatile lighter 38SH5C based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The effect image is displayed on the versatile lighter 38SH5C. The versatile writer 38SH5C has a display area in which various effect images can be displayed by the LED during the rotation operation. In this example, the plate 38SH5C1 of the versatile lighter 38SH5C is provided so that the display area of the versatile lighter 38SH5C is arranged on the right side of the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the zone telop image 38SH30 extending in the left-right direction from the right end in the display area of the versatile writer 38SH5C to the left end in the display area of the image display apparatus 5 across the image display device 5 and the versatile writer 38SH5C.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to move from the right end to the left side in the display area of the versatile writer 38SH5C. When the character information 38SH31 reaches the left end of the display area of the versatile writer 38SH5C, it is not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the versatile writer 38SH5C as a result of the character information 38SH31 being moved from the right side to the left side by the versatile writer 38SH5C, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character information that is no longer displayed on the versatile writer 38SH5C. The characters 38SH31 are displayed so as to move from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left side. Then, when the characters of the character information 38SH31 reach the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, they are not displayed with further movement. As described above, when the character information 38SH31 is not displayed on the image display device 5 as a result of moving the character information 38SH31 from the right side to the left side on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image information on the image display device 5. The character information 38SH31 that is no longer displayed is displayed again so as to move from the right end to the left side of the display area of the versatile writer 38SH5C.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-27 (A), it is provided that the image display device 5 and the versatile writer 38SH5C are provided, and the prefetch zone effect is being executed across the image display device 5 and the versatile writer 38SH5C. By displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 to be notified, a suitable display can be performed by the image display device 5 and the versatile writer 38SH5C.

(Explanation 2 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH))
Further, the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) can display characters as the related display, and when displaying the related display across the first display means and the second display means, the first display means Characters larger than the size of the non-display area between the display area and the display area of the second display means can be displayed.

(Example 4 of production operations related to the characteristic part 38SH (40SH))
20-28 is an enlarged view of a main part in which a portion where the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A are adjacent to each other is enlarged. In the image display device 5 of this example, a display area is formed inside the frame portion 38SH5F. Similarly, the sub image display device 38SH5A has a display area formed inside the frame portion 38SH5AF.

  When the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A, the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are the display area of the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 38SH5A. Are displayed across the display area. Thus, when displaying the characters of the character information 38SH31, when the display mode is such that part of the characters is hidden in the portions corresponding to the frame portion 38SH5F and the frame portion 38SH5AF, the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. And characters displayed across the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A may be difficult or impossible to recognize.

  Here, the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5 and the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF of the sub-image display device 38SH5A are known dimensions. Therefore, when displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A, the effect control CPU 120 adds the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F and the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF. Character information 38SH31 having a font size that is longer than the length L2 of each character in the width direction is displayed.

  However, even if the font size is longer in the length L2 in the width direction of each character than the length L1 obtained by adding the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F and the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF, as a result, the image display device The character displayed across the display area of 5 and the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A may be difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, at the design stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, simulation is performed to determine whether a person can distinguish characters when displaying text information of a telop image such as the zone telop image 38SH30 across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. By doing so, the font size of the character information may be determined. Further, even when the font size is the same, depending on the character shape, when displayed across the display area of the image display device 5 and the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A, the characters that can be recognized and the recognition difficulty or recognition Some characters are impossible. For example, even if the letter “Z” is visible, the letter “I” tends to be difficult or impossible to recognize if the vertical line is hidden. Therefore, when a character string including characters that are difficult to recognize or cannot be recognized is displayed as character information, it is only necessary to prevent the character from being difficult or unrecognizable by using bold or italic characters.

  For example, when the sub-image display device 38SH5A is moved to the front of the display area of the image display device 5 so that a part of the display area of the image display device 5 is hidden by the sub-image display device 38SH5A, the image display device 5 Since the frame portion 38SH5F is hidden by the sub-image display device 38SH5A, the character information 38SH31 of the font size is longer in the width direction length L2 of each character than the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF of the sub-image display device 38SH5A. Show it.

  Similarly, when the image display device 5 is moved to the front of the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A so that a part of the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A is hidden by the image display device 5, the sub-image display device 38SH5A. Since the frame portion 38SH5F is hidden by the image display device 5, the character information 38SH31 having a font size longer than the width L2 of each character in the width direction is displayed rather than the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5. That's fine.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-28, the character information 38SH31 can be displayed as the zone telop image 38SH30, and the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. Furthermore, the length L2 in the width direction of each character is larger than the length L1 obtained by adding the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5 and the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5AF of the sub-image display device 38SH5A. By displaying the character information 38SH31 having a long font size, the zone telop image 38SH30 can be suitably displayed.

(Explanation 3 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH))
Further, when the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) displays the related display across the first display means and the second display means, the contents of the related display can be recognized only by one display means. It can be displayed.

(Example 5 of production operations related to the characteristic part 38SH (40SH))
In the example shown in FIG. 20-29A, when the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 51, all characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed as images. Since it is displayed in the display area of the display device 5, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized only by the image display device 5.

(Example 6 of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
In the example shown in FIG. 20-29 (B), when the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 51, all characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed as sub characters. Since the image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 38SH5A, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized only by the sub-image display device 38SH5A.

  Here, the width dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 and the width dimension of the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A are known dimensions. Therefore, in the design stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the font size that can display all the characters of the character information of the telop image such as the zone telop image 38SH30 or the display region of the sub-image display device 38SH5A The font size that can be displayed is determined.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-29, when the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A, all the characters in the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed. Suitable to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or by displaying all the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 in the display region of the sub-image display device 38SH5A. The zone telop image 38SH30 can be displayed. For example, even when characters displayed across the display area of the image display device 5 and the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A are difficult to recognize or cannot be recognized, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 are changed. It becomes possible to recognize.

(Explanation 4 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH))
In addition, the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) includes, as the related display, a first related display capable of displaying characters across the first display means and the second display means, and the first display means and the second display. A second related display capable of displaying a character without straddling the means, a character displayed in the first related display, and a character displayed in the second related display, The size is different.

(Example 7 of production operations related to the characteristic part 38SH (40SH))
In the example shown in FIG. 20-30 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays a zone telop image 38SH30 extending left and right so that characters straddle the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 extending vertically on the image display device 5. Therefore, the characters of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 in this example are not displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A.

  Here, when displaying a plurality of telop images such as the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50, it is easier to recognize the contents of each telop image if the character size in each telop image is different.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A, the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5 and the frame of the sub-image display device 38SH5A are displayed. The zone telop image 38SH30 is preferably displayed by displaying the character information 38SH31 having a longer font size than the length L1 obtained by adding the width dimensions of the portion 38SH5AF. be able to.

  For this reason, the character size of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A tends to be a large character. Therefore, in making the character size of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 and the character size of the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 different from the size of the characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30, When the character size of the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 is increased, the visibility is increased simply because the character is large, but the display area for displaying the effect image of the prefetch zone effect is only narrowed. Or it will look ugly as a whole.

  Therefore, when displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous characters so that the characters are smaller than the character size of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30. By displaying the character information 38SH51 of the telop image 38SH50, in other words, by displaying the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to be larger than the size of the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50. In addition, it is possible to secure a sufficient display area for displaying the effect image of the pre-read zone effect, and to prevent the appearance as a whole from being unpleasant.

(Example of effect operation 8 regarding the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
In the example shown in FIG. 20-30 (B), the effect control CPU 120 displays a zone telop image 38SH30 extending left and right so that characters straddle the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 extending vertically in the sub-image display device 38SH5A. Therefore, the characters of the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 in this example are not displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A.

  Also in this example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character smaller than the character size of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 when displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50. Thus, by displaying the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50, in other words, the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 so as to be larger than the size of the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50. By displaying “”, it is possible to secure a sufficient display area for displaying the effect image of the pre-read zone effect, and to prevent the appearance as a whole from being unpleasant.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), the zone telop image 38SH30 extending left and right is displayed on the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A so that the characters straddle, and the image display device 5 is displayed. Alternatively, when displaying the pseudo continuous telop image 38SH50 that extends vertically on the sub-image display device 38SH5A, if a display area for displaying the effect image of the pre-read zone effect can be sufficiently secured, or the overall appearance is unsatisfactory. If not, the character information 38SH51 of the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 may be displayed so as to be larger than the character size of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20-30, the zone telop image 38SH30 capable of displaying the character information 38SH31 across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A, the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. The pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 that can display the character information 38SH51 without straddling and can be displayed, and the characters of the character information 38SH31 displayed in the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 are displayed. Since the character size of the character information 38SH51 is different, the zone telop image 38SH30 and the pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50 can be suitably displayed.

  Note that, for a telop image in which characters do not straddle the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A, the width dimension of the frame portion 38SH5F of the image display device 5 and the width of the frame portion 38SH5AF of the sub-image display device 38SH5A. Character information having a font size in which the length in the width direction of each character is shorter than the length obtained by adding the dimensions may be displayed.

(Example 9 of the effect operation relating to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH))
Note that the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A are vertically adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. 20-31. . That is, the effect control CPU 120 can display, for example, a zone telop image 38SH30 for informing that the pre-read zone effect is being executed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A arranged vertically. .

  In the case of such an aspect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the height dimension of the lower frame of the image display device 5 when displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A. It is only necessary to display the character information 38SH31 having a font size in which the length in the height direction of each character is longer than the length obtained by adding the height of the upper frame of the sub-image display device 38SH5D.

  In addition, regarding the telop image 38SH50 in which characters do not straddle between the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5D, the height dimension of the lower frame of the image display device 5 and the upper frame of the sub-image display device 38SH5D. Character information 38SH51 having a font size in which the length in the height direction of each character is shorter than the length obtained by adding the height dimensions of the characters may be displayed.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 38SH (40SH))
(1) A gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game, and a first display means (for example, an image display device 5 or the like). And a second display means (for example, a sub-image display device 38SH5A), and can display a related display related to a predetermined state across the first display means and the second display means (for example, an image). The zone telop image 38SH30 for notifying that the prefetch zone effect is being executed is displayed across the display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A).

  According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1), characters (for example, character information 38SH31) can be displayed as related displays (for example, zone telop image 38SH30, etc.), and the first display means and the second display When displaying the related display across the means, it is possible to display characters larger than the size of the non-display area between the display area of the first display means and the display area of the second display means (for example, The length of each character in the width direction is longer than the sum of the width of the frame 38SH5F of the image display device 5 and the width of the frame 38SH5AF of the sub-image display 38SH5A. Display character information 38SH31, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), when the related display (for example, the zone telop image 38SH30) is displayed across the first display means and the second display means, The content of the related display may be recognizable only by the display means (for example, all characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or And all characters of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30 are displayed in the display area of the sub-image display device 38SH5A).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

  (4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), as a related display, characters (for example, character information 38SH31) can be displayed across the first display means and the second display means. 1st related display (for example, zone telop image 38SH30 etc.) and the 2nd related display which can display a character (for example, character information 38SH51 etc.) without straddling said 1st display means and said 2nd display means (For example, pseudo-continuous telop image 38SH50) can be displayed, and the size of the character is different between the character displayed in the first related display and the character displayed in the second related display. (For example, the character information 38SH5 of the quasi-continuous telop image 38SH50 may be smaller than the character size of the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30.) It displays, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

(Explanation regarding feature 38SH (40SH) and feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic portion 31AK is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is controlled to the first display means, the second display means, and the advantageous state. Suggesting effect executing means capable of executing the suggesting effect that suggests being performed, and title notifying means capable of notifying the title corresponding to the suggesting effect. And a title alerting | reporting means can display the title corresponding to the said suggestion effect as a related display relevant to a predetermined state across a 1st display means and a 2nd display means, when the predetermined period passes from the start of an suggestion effect. It is.

(Explanation 1 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH))
Next, the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH) of the present embodiment will be described.

  The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a specification that executes a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means and the display means. The display unit can display a related display related to a predetermined state, and can display a first related display that receives a change caused by a specific effect and a second related display that does not receive a change caused by the specific effect. It is.

  In the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH), the first related display is a related display related to the effect state, and the second related display is a related display related to the game state.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH), the first related display is displayed in a mode with an operation, and is displayed in a mode with an operation even when the specific effect is changed. .

  On the other hand, the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and executes a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means and the display means. Specific display means, and the display means can display a related display related to a predetermined state in a mode involving an operation, and the related display operates even when the specific display changes due to execution of the specific effect. It can be displayed in an accompanying manner.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH), as the related display, a first related display that receives a change due to the specific effect and a second related display that does not receive a change due to the specific effect can be displayed.

  In the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH), the first related display is a related display related to the effect state, and the second related display is a related display related to the game state.

(Example 1 of rendering operation relating to the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH))
FIGS. 20-32 shows the example of the production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). In this example, as a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means, a reduction effect that reduces a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate will be described as an example. Further, in this example, a big hit telop image for notifying that a big hit effect is being executed is described as an example of a display that receives a change due to a specific effect and is related to the effect state. Further, in this example, an error telop image that reports an error will be described as an example of a display that is not affected by a specific effect and that is a second related display related to the gaming state.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute a reduction effect that reduces a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display an error telop image for notifying an error. In the example shown in FIG. 20-32, an example will be described in which an error telop image 38SH90 is displayed in which an abnormality that the bottom plate is full is notified by the character information 39SH91 that “please remove the ball”.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 on the condition that the big hit effect is being executed. For example, when it is detected that the lower plate is full, the effect control CPU 120 displays the error telop image 38SH90. Therefore, when it is detected that the lower plate is full in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (A), the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the error telop image 38SH90, Will be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reduction effect on the condition that the execution timing of the reduction effect is reached, and reduces the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at the common reduction rate. Therefore, when it is the execution timing of the reduction effect in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (B), for example, a character image or a display showing the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state. The plurality of displays displayed during the big hit effect are reduced at a common reduction rate. Then, when the reduction effect is executed, a black outside display region 38SHBK is formed around the changed display. By executing such a reduction effect, the interest of the effect can be improved.

  At that time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 at a common reduction rate as shown in FIG. That is, the big hit telop image 38SH10 related to the effect state of the big hit effect is subjected to a change due to the reduction effect.

  Here, if the situation in which the lower plate is full is left unattended, the warning sound continues to sound with the display of the error telop image 38SH90 until the situation is resolved, which may be annoying to surrounding players. End up.

  Accordingly, the effect control CPU 120 does not reduce the error telop image 38SH90 even when the reduction effect is executed, as shown in FIG. That is, the error telop image 38SH90 related to the gaming state of error is not affected by the reduction effect.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-32, a reduction effect that reduces a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate can be executed, and the jackpot telop image 38SH10 that receives a change due to the reduction effect. Since the error telop image 38SH90 that is not affected by the reduction effect can be displayed, the telop image 38SH10 can be enhanced by the effect of the reduction effect, while the error telop image 38SH90 is reduced. By not receiving the change due to the performance, it is possible to appropriately notify that the lower plate is full.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-32, a big hit telop image for notifying that the big hit effect is being executed is shown as an example of a display that receives a change due to a specific effect and is related to the effect state. For telops that include text information that is displayed for the purpose of notifying the player, such as a big hit telop image, the display is not affected by the specific effects and is related to the gaming state. It may be displayed as a second related display.

  On the other hand, a telop that includes character information related to an effect that is not intended to notify the player, such as a telop that includes character information indicating the lyrics of a song, is a display that receives a change due to a specific effect. Thus, it is a telop that can be displayed as the first related display related to the effect state but is not affected by the specific effect and cannot be displayed as the second related display related to the gaming state.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, an error telop image for notifying the abnormality that the lower plate is full as a second related display related to the gaming state is a display that is not affected by the specific effect. As an example, the so-called controller connection error, vibration motor error error, magnet error, switch error error, incorrect winning error, payout error, main control board communication error, sub board mismatch error, out of ball error, card unit error The telop image for notifying various errors is a display that is not affected by the specific effect and can be displayed as the second related display related to the gaming state.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a telop that is displayed together with an effect with a high jackpot expectation in addition to a telop that informs the gaming state, such as a telop that informs that the control is in the probability variation state or the short time state. The telops that are executed together with the effects that are particularly important can be displayed as telops that are not affected by the specific effects.

(Example 2 of rendering operation relating to the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH))
FIG. 20-33 shows another example of the effect operation related to the feature portion 38SH (41SH) and the feature portion 38SH (42SH). In this example, as a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means, an example of an expansion effect that enlarges a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common magnification will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute an enlargement effect that enlarges a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common enlargement ratio.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 on the condition that the big hit effect is being executed. For example, when it is detected that the lower plate is full, the effect control CPU 120 displays the error telop image 38SH90. Therefore, when it is detected that the lower plate is full in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (A), the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the error telop image 38SH90, Will be displayed at the same time.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the enlargement effect on the condition that the execution timing of the enlargement effect is reached, and enlarges the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common enlargement rate. Therefore, when it is the execution timing of the expansion effect in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (B), for example, a character image or a display showing the number of rounds in the big hit game state. The plurality of displays displayed during the big hit effect are enlarged at a common enlargement ratio. Then, when the enlargement effect is executed, a plurality of displays changed by the enlargement effect do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Executing such an expansion effect can improve the interest of the effect.

  At that time, the effect control CPU 120 also displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 at a common enlargement ratio, as shown in FIG. In other words, the big hit telop image 38SH10 related to the effect state of the big hit effect is subjected to a change due to the enlargement effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not enlarge the error telop image 38SH90 even when the enlargement effect is executed. That is, the error telop image 38SH90 related to the gaming state of error is not affected by the enlargement effect.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-33, an enlargement effect that enlarges a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common enlargement ratio can be executed, and the jackpot telop image 38SH10 that receives a change due to the enlargement effect. Since the error telop image 38SH90 that is not affected by the enlargement effect can be displayed, the interest of the effect can be improved by receiving the change due to the enlargement effect of the telop image 38SH10, while the error telop image 38SH90 is enlarged. By not receiving the change due to the performance, it is possible to appropriately notify that the lower plate is full.

(Example 3 of production operations relating to the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH))
FIGS. 20-32 shows the example of the production | presentation operation | movement regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). In this example, an image blur effect that collectively vibrates a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 will be described as an example of a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute an image blur effect that vibrates a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 together.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the big hit telop image 38SH10 on the condition that the big hit effect is being executed. For example, when it is detected that the lower plate is full, the effect control CPU 120 displays the error telop image 38SH90. Accordingly, when it is detected that the lower plate is full in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (A), the big hit telop image 38SH10 and the error telop image 38SH90, Will be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the image blur effect on the condition that the execution timing of the image blur effect is reached, and vibrates a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 together. Therefore, when the image blur effect is executed in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 displays, for example, a character image or a display indicating the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. A plurality of displays displayed during the big hit effect are vibrated together. Then, by executing the image blur effect, a black outside display area 38SHBK is formed around the changed display. Executing such an image blur effect can improve the interest of the effect.

  At that time, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the big hit telop image 38SH10 together with other displays. In other words, the big hit telop image 38SH10 related to the effect state of the big hit effect is subjected to a change due to the image blur effect.

  Here, if the situation in which the lower plate is full is left unattended, the warning sound continues to sound with the display of the error telop image 38SH90 until the situation is resolved, which may be annoying to surrounding players. End up.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not vibrate the error telop image 38SH90 even when the image blur effect is executed. That is, the error telop image 38SH90 related to the gaming state of error is not affected by the image blur effect.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-34, an image blur effect that collectively vibrates a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 can be executed, and the jackpot telop image 38SH10 that receives a change due to the image blur effect Since the error telop image 38SH90 that is not affected by the image blur effect can be displayed, the telop image 38SH10 can be enhanced by the effect due to the image blur effect, while the error telop image 38SH90 is improved. By not receiving the change due to the image blur effect, it is possible to appropriately notify that the lower plate is full.

  (Example 4 of rendering operations related to the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH))

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the big hit telop image 38SH10 together with other displays when executing the image blur effect as shown in FIGS.

  Here, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 can display the big hit telop image 38SH10 informing that the big hit effect is being executed in a manner in which the character information 38SH11 moves. The effect control CPU 120 in this example changes the jackpot telop image 38SH10 by the image blur effect as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B) showing a state immediately after the state shown in FIG. 20-35 (A). In addition, the character information 38SH11 of the big hit telop image 38SH10 is moved.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-35, the big hit telop image 38SH10 is displayed in such a manner that the character information 38SH11 moves, and the character information 38SH11 moves even when the image blur effect is changed. By displaying in an aspect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect when the image blur effect is executed.

(Explanation 2 regarding the feature 38SH (41SH) and the feature 38SH (42SH))
In addition, in the gaming machine having the feature part 38SH (41SH) or the feature part 38SH (42SH), the display area outside area appears in response to the specific effect being executed, and the second related display extends over the display area outside area. The content can also be recognized when displayed across the display area.

(Example 5 of rendering operations relating to the feature 38SH (41SH) and the feature 38SH (42SH))
20-36 shows a state in which the image blur effect has been executed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-36, an error telop image 39SH90 in which mostly black black character information 38SH91 is displayed in front of a translucent belt-like background image will be described as an example.

  As described above, the error telop image 38SH90 is not affected by the image blur effect. Therefore, for example, when the error telop image 38SH90 extending left and right from the left end to the right end in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed, the error telop image 38SH90 is displayed in the area outside the black display area by executing the image blurring effect. It will be displayed across 38SHBK.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (A), when the character information 38SH91 of the error telop image 38SH90 is displayed in the display area corresponding to the non-display area 38SHBK, it can be seen through the translucent background image. The black character information 38SH91 is assimilated to the black display region outside region 38SHBK, and the content of the error telop image 38SH90 is difficult to recognize.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (B), the character information 38SH91 of the error telop image 38SH90 is moved, and all the characters of the character information 38SH91 are displayed in a display changed by the image blur effect. By doing so, the contents of the error telop image 38SH90 can be recognized.

  Note that all the characters of the character information 38SH91 do not have to be displayed at the same time in the display changed by the image blur effect. For example, if the character information 38SH91 of the error telop image 38SH90 is moved and the characters of the character information 38SH91 are sequentially displayed in the display changed by the image blur effect, the character information Even when all the characters of 38SH91 cannot be displayed simultaneously in the display changed by the image blur effect, the contents of the error telop image 38SH90 can be recognized.

(Example 6 of rendering operations relating to the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH))
FIG. 20-37 shows a state in which the image blur effect has been executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-37, an error telop image 39SH90 in which mostly white text information 38SH91 is displayed in front of a translucent belt-like background image will be described as an example.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-37 (A) and (B), even if the character information 38SH91 of the error telop image 38SH90 is displayed in the display area corresponding to the non-display area 38SHBK, it is translucent. Since it is not assimilated to the black display area 38SHBK seen through the background image, the white text information 38SH91 can be visually recognized, and the contents of the error telop image 38SH90 can be recognized.

  Thus, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20-36 and 20-37, the display area outside region 38SHBK appears in response to the execution of the image blur effect, and the error telop image 38SH90 straddles the display area outside region 38SHBK. The error telop image 38SH90 can be suitably displayed by displaying the contents in a recognizable manner even when displayed across the display area outside the area SHSHBK.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 38SH (41SH))
(1) A gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game, and display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) Specific effect means for executing a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction ratio. The display means can perform a related display related to a predetermined state (for example, the big hit telop image 38SH10 for notifying that the big hit effect is being executed) Error telop image 38SH90 or the like for notifying that the tank is full, and as a related display, a first related display that receives a change due to the specific effect (for example, A big hit telop image 38SH10 etc.) that undergoes a change due to the small effect, the second related display free from changes due to specific effect (e.g., is capable of displaying an error telop image 38SH90 etc.) and not subject to change due to the reduced effect.

  According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the first related display is a related display related to the effect state (for example, the big hit telop image 38SH10 is a telop image notifying the big hit effect), (2) The related display may be related display related to the gaming state (for example, the error telop image 38SH90 is a telop image for notifying that the lower plate is full).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the first related display is displayed in a mode with an action (for example, displaying the big hit telop image 38SH10 in a mode in which the character information 38SH11 moves, etc.) ), It may be displayed in an aspect accompanied by an operation even when the specific effect is changed (for example, the character information 38SH11 is moved even when the image effect is changed. Etc.)

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

  (4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), an area outside the display area (for example, the area outside the display area 38SHBK) in response to the execution of the specific effect (for example, the image blur effect). Etc.), the second related display can be displayed across the area outside the display area, and the content may be displayed in a recognizable manner when displayed across the area outside the display area (for example, The error telop image 38SH90 can be displayed across the display area outside area 38SHBK, and the content can be recognized when it is displayed across the display area outside area SHSHBK).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

(Explanation regarding the feature 38SH (41SH) and the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic portion 31AK is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is common to the display means and the plurality of displays displayed on the display means. A specific effect means for executing a specific effect that gives a change, an suggestion effect execution means that can execute an suggestion effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state, and a title notification means that can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect Prepare. And a title alerting | reporting means can display the title corresponding to the said suggestion effect as a related display relevant to a predetermined state, when the predetermined period passes since the start of the suggestion effect. In addition, as the related display related to the predetermined state, a first related display that receives a change due to the specific effect and a second related display that does not receive a change due to the specific effect can be displayed.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 38SH (42SH))
(1) A gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game, and display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) Specific effect means for executing a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction ratio. The display means is capable of displaying a related display related to a predetermined state in a mode accompanied by an action (for example, a big hit effect is being executed). For example, displaying the big hit telop image 38SH10 informing the character information 38SH11 in a manner in which the character information 38SH11 moves), and the related display is accompanied by an operation even when the specific effect is changed. It can be displayed in a mode (e.g., character information 38SH11 even when the change by effect image blur is performed is displayed in a manner to move, etc.).

  According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), as the related display, a first related display that receives a change due to the specific effect (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 that receives a change due to a reduction effect) and a change due to the specific effect. The second related display that is not received (for example, the error telop image 38SH90 that is not affected by the reduction effect) may be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

  (3) In the gaming machine of (2), the first related display is a related display related to the effect state (for example, the big hit telop image 38SH10 is a telop image for notifying the big hit effect), (2) The related display may be related display related to the gaming state (for example, the error telop image 38SH90 is a telop image for notifying that the lower plate is full).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

  (4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), an area outside the display area appears in response to the execution of the specific effect, and the second related display spans the area outside the display area. The content may be displayed in a recognizable manner even when displayed across the area outside the display area.

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH) and the characteristic portion 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 38SH (42SH) and the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH) and the characteristic portion 31AK is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is common to the display means and the plurality of displays displayed on the display means. A specific effect means for executing a specific effect that gives a change, an suggestion effect execution means that can execute an suggestion effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state, and a title notification means that can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect Prepare. And a title alerting | reporting means can display the title corresponding to the said suggestion effect in the aspect accompanied by operation | movement as a related display relevant to a predetermined state, when the predetermined period passes since the start of the suggestion effect. Further, the related display can be displayed in a mode with an action even when the specific effect is changed by executing the specific effect.

(Explanation 1 regarding the feature 38SH (63IW) 1)
Next, the characteristic part 38SH (63IW) of this Embodiment is demonstrated. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine that performs a game, and includes a display unit capable of displaying a related display regarding a predetermined state, and the display unit is formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions. The display can be displayed.

(Explanation 2 regarding the feature 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine that performs a game, and includes a display unit capable of displaying a related display regarding a predetermined state, and the display unit displays the related display formed in a curved shape. It can be displayed.

(Example 1 of production operations relating to the characteristic part 38SH (63IW))
Next, a display mode in the case of displaying a related display regarding a predetermined state will be described. 20-38 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of a right-handed instruction image. 20-38, the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  In this embodiment, an operation instruction effect for displaying a right-handed instruction image for instructing right-handedness on the image display device 5 as a related display in the high base state (that is, the probability changing state or the short-time state) is performed (for example, , Corresponding to steps S673 and S676).

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-38, the image display device 5 displays a right-handed instruction image 38SH200a composed of a curved area. In this embodiment, when a right-handed operation is performed, the game ball launched from the ball striking device moves in an arc along the ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7. Then, it will descend to the area on the right side of the game area 7. That is, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a formed of a curved area has a shape that is likened to the trajectory of the game ball when the right-handed operation is performed. Further, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a is configured in such a manner that a character string “→ right-handed →” is included in a curved area. By adopting such an aspect, the player can intuitively recognize the content of the instruction, and can effectively instruct the right hand.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-38 (1) to (4), in the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a, the character string “→ right-handed →” moves from the left end to the right end within the curved area. It is displayed in such a manner. By setting it as such an aspect, it becomes easy for a player to recognize the content of an instruction | indication, and it can instruct | indicate the right handing more effectively.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-38 (5) to (6), the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a is a character string "→ right-handed-> erased by reaching the right end of the curved area. "Is displayed in such a manner that it is displayed again from the left end.

  The right-handed instruction image 38SH200a is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 20-38. For example, a plurality of character strings “→ right-handed →” move from the left end part to the right end part in a curved area. It may be displayed in such a manner. Further, the character string is not limited to a mode in which the character string is moved at a constant speed, but may be one in which the moving speed changes or stops. Specifically, in the region from the left end to the center of the curved region, the character string may move faster than the region from the center to the right end. Good. Alternatively, the display may be stopped for a predetermined period when a character string is displayed from the left end, and then stopped and displayed for a predetermined period after moving to the right end. Further, the movement speed may be changed a plurality of times (for example, high speed → low speed → high speed, high speed → medium speed → low speed, etc.), and the movement speed may be changed and stopped at a predetermined position. It may be.

  20-39 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of a left-handed instruction image. 20-39, the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  In this embodiment, a left-handed instruction image for instructing left-handed as a related display when a transition is made from a high base state (that is, a probability changing state or a short-time state) to a low base state (that is, a normal state). Is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, corresponding to the process of step S671).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-39, the image display device 5 displays a left-handed instruction image 38SH200b composed of a curved area. Further, the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b is configured in such a manner that a character string “← left-handed ←” is included in a curved area.

  As described above, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a has a shape similar to the trajectory of the game ball when the right-handed operation is performed, and the character string “→ right-handed →” is displayed in the curved area. It is displayed in such a manner as to move from the left end to the right end. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 20-39 (1) to (4), the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b instructing to return from right-handed to left-handed has the same shape as the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a. However, the character string “← left strike ←” is displayed in such a manner that it moves from the right end portion to the left end portion in the curved area. That is, how to change from the trajectory of the game ball at the time of the right strike is indicated by the shape of the left strike instruction image 38SH200b and the display mode of the character string. By setting it as such an aspect, it becomes easy for a player to recognize the content of an instruction | indication, and it can instruct | indicate left-handed more effectively.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-39 (5) to (6), the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b is a character string “← left-handed ←” erased by reaching the left end of the curved area. "Is displayed in such a manner that part of" is displayed again from the right end.

  The right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39 are, for example, display positions of character strings (“→ right-handed →” or “← left-handed ←”) in the area. Are composed of a plurality of images. Note that a right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and a left-handed instruction image 38SH200b as shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39 may be realized by reproducing the moving image data.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b can be displayed in a curved shape, thereby forming a uniform rectangular shape. These images can be displayed more effectively than when the display can be performed only by the performed mode, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b can be displayed in a manner in which a character string is moved within a predetermined area. An image can be displayed effectively and a production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b are erased when they reach the left end part. By displaying the character string in such a manner that a part of the character string is displayed again from the right end portion, it is possible to effectively display these images and enhance the production effect.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-38 and 20-39, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the left-handed instruction image 38SH200b can be displayed in a manner corresponding to the gaming state (for example, a high base state (ie, When the right strike is valid), the character string “→ right strike →” is displayed in a manner that moves from the left end to the right end within the region, and when the low base state (ie, left strike is valid), By displaying the character string “← left strike ←” in such a manner that it moves from the right end portion to the left end portion in the area), these images can be effectively displayed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  20-40 is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the production commentary image regarding a development production. 20-40, the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  In this embodiment, during the reach, it is possible to execute a development effect that suggests the development of a reach with higher reliability. FIG. 20-40 shows a development effect in which the character develops a reach with a higher degree of reliability if the character attempts to pass the minefield and can pass, and if the character cannot pass, the outage is fixed.

  When the development effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 20-40 (1) and (2), landmines 38SH201a to 38SH201c are displayed on the image display device 5, and the development effect is explained as a related display. The production commentary image 38SH200c is displayed. The production commentary image 38SH200c is configured in such a manner as to include a zigzag-shaped arrow-shaped region indicating a route that avoids the landmines 38SH201a to 38SH201c. Specifically, the arrow-shaped region includes an arrowhead portion and a arrowhead portion, and the arrowhead portion is formed in a zigzag shape by having two bent portions. That is, the production commentary image 38SH200c has a bent portion and includes an area formed to extend in a plurality of directions (in other words, an area formed from a plurality of linear areas extending in different directions). It is configured.

  In addition, the production commentary image 38SH200c is configured in such a manner that a character string “Proceed with avoiding landmines” is shown in the arrow-shaped region formed in a zigzag shape to indicate that the development production is to challenge the passage of the minefield. . In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-40 (1) and (2), in the presentation commentary image 38SH200c, the character string “Proceeding to avoid landmines” is displayed from the lower end to the upper end in the arrow-shaped region formed in a zigzag shape. It is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the part. When the character string “Proceed with avoiding landmines” reaches the upper end, the characters are erased one by one, and the erased characters are displayed again from the lower end. That is, a series of displays shown in FIGS. 20-40 (1) and (2) are repeatedly performed for a predetermined period. By setting it as such an aspect, it can show effectively that it is the effect which aims at advancing avoiding a land mine toward the upper direction from the display region lower part side of image display device 5, and can enhance an effect effect. Can do.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-40 (1) and (2), the effect commentary image 38SH200c displays a part of the character string “Advance Avoiding Landmines” in an arrow-shaped area formed in a zigzag shape. Thereafter, all the characters are gradually displayed, but the character string “Proceed with avoiding landmines” may always be displayed. Further, in addition to the production commentary image 38SH200c, a detailed explanation of the production (specifically, if the character challenges the passage of the minefield and can pass, it develops to a more reliable reach, and if the character cannot pass, there is a loss. An effect commentary image indicating that it is determined) may be displayed. In addition to the display of the production commentary image 38SH200c, the speaker 27 may output the voice “Proceed with avoiding landmines”. In this case, for example, this voice is output at the timing when the display of the character string shown in FIG. In addition, with respect to the production commentary image 38SH200c, for example, a mode in which the shape, color, size, and the like of the region are different, and a mode in which the font, color, size, movement mode (for example, speed and number of pauses) of the character string are different are provided, Depending on which mode is used for the display, the degree of expectation for successful passage of the minefield may be different.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-40 (3), in the image display device 5, the effect commentary image 38SH200c is erased, and the character 38SH202 challenging the passage of the minefield is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-40 (4A) to (5A), when the character succeeds in passing by avoiding the landmines 38SH201a to 38SH201c, it is informed that the SP reach will be developed with higher reliability. Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 20-40 (4B) to (5B), when an effect is performed in which the character explodes upon contact with the landmine 38SH201c (that is, the character fails to pass through the landmines 38SH201a to 38SH201c). Then, an effect that the deviation is confirmed is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 20-40, the production commentary image 38SH200c has a bent portion and is formed to extend in a plurality of directions (in other words, formed from a plurality of linear regions extending in different directions. Display), it is possible to display a larger number of character strings than when it is possible to display only by a mode formed in a uniform rectangular shape. It can display effectively and can improve the production effect. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-40, the arrow-type area | region which has two bending parts is shown, However, Not only such an aspect but the aspect which has one bending part may be sufficient, 3 The aspect which has two or more bending parts may be sufficient. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 20-40, an arrow-shaped region having a bent portion that is bent at a right angle is shown, but the angle of bending may be other than a right angle, and the angle of bending for each bent portion may be different. It may be different.

  20-38 to 20-39 and the example shown in FIG. 20-40 are combined to have a curved region, a bent portion, and extend in a plurality of directions. You may make it use the related display comprised by the aspect containing the formed area | region. For example, the effect explanation image may include an area formed in an “Ω” shape, and a character string for explaining the contents of the effect may be moved in the area.

  In addition, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 20 to 40, the presentation commentary image is configured in a mode including an area formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions in a planar manner. It may be configured by an aspect including a region formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions.

  FIGS. 20-41 is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect commentary image regarding an accessory effect. Here, it is assumed that an effect effect that moves the movable member in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 20-41 (A1), in the image display device 5, the effect explanation image 38SH200e that suggests that the accessory effect is executed is displayed as the related display before the accessory effect is executed. The production commentary image 38SH200e has an area extending in the vertical direction and an area extending in the horizontal direction indicating the moving direction of the movable member (strictly, as shown in FIG. 20-41, on the plane that seems to extend in the horizontal direction). (In other words, the region depicted on the display screen of the image display device 5). That is, the production commentary image 38SH200e is configured by an aspect including a region formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions in a three-dimensional manner.

  The production commentary image 38SH200e includes the character string “falling” indicating the operation content of the movable member in the region extending in the vertical direction, and the operation content of the movable member in the region extending in the horizontal direction. The character string “pops out” is included. By setting it as such an aspect, the content of the effect production which a movable member operate | moves in three dimensions can be suggested effectively, and an effect can be heightened. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-41, although the aspect which has one bending part bent in the horizontal direction from the perpendicular direction is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect, The aspect which has two or more bending parts It may be. For example, the aspect which has the bending part bent in the horizontal direction from the perpendicular direction and the bending part bent in the vertical direction from the horizontal direction may be sufficient. Further, a region formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions in plan as shown in FIG. 20-40 and a region formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions in three dimensions as shown in FIG. It may be an aspect including.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-41 (B1) to (B4), the shape of the area indicated by the effect explanation image 38SH200e may be changed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-41 (B1) to (B4), the production commentary image 38SH200e is displayed in the horizontal direction when the character string “falls” reaches the lower end from the upper end in the region extending in the vertical direction. An extended region is added (FIG. 20-41 (B3)). Then, the character string “jump out” is displayed in a mode extending from the upper end portion to the lower end portion (that is, a mode that appears to move from the gaming machine side toward the player side) in the region extending in the horizontal direction ( Fig. 20-41 (B4) to (B5)).

  The configuration of the present embodiment can also be applied to an operation instruction notification for instructing a player to perform a predetermined operation.

  20-42 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of the operation instruction image. Here, it is assumed that a jog dial that can be rotated is provided. As shown in FIG. 20-42, the operation instruction notification for instructing the rotation operation of the jog dial is performed by displaying the jog dial image 204 imitating the jog dial and the operation instruction image 38SH200d.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-42, in the image display device 5, as the related display, an operation instruction image 38SH200d including an annular arrow-shaped region surrounding the jog dial image 204 is displayed. Specifically, the arrow-shaped region includes an arrowhead portion and a arrowhead portion, and the arrowhead portion is formed in an annular shape. Further, the operation instruction image 38SH200d is configured in such a manner that the character string “Turn the jog!” Is included in the arrow-shaped region.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-42 (1) to (3), the operation instruction image 38 SH 200 d has a character string “Turn the jog!” In a circular arrow-shaped region surrounding the jog dial image 204. It is displayed in such a manner as to move around. By setting it as such a mode, it becomes easy to recognize the content of the operation instruction to rotate the jog dial clockwise, and the operation can be instructed more effectively.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-38 to 20-42, a single related display is displayed. However, a plurality of related displays having different aspects can be displayed in parallel and can be displayed in a superimposed manner. .

20-43 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of a right-handed instruction image and an error notification image.
In the example shown in FIG. 20-43, the image display device 5 displays a right-handed instruction image 38SH200a made up of a curved area. Further, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a is configured in such a manner that a character string “→ right-handed →” is included in a curved area.

  Here, when a full tank error state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 20-38 (2) to (4), the error notification image 38SH200g is displayed as a related display in a manner of being superimposed on the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a. The error notification image 38SH200g is displayed in such a manner that the character string “please pull out a full error sphere” moves from the right end portion to the left end portion in the rectangular area. Note that the error notification image 38SH200g may be configured such that the character string does not move and the visibility is improved so that the error content can be easily recognized.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-43, the error notification image including information with higher priority is displayed preferentially (that is, the upper layer) among the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the error notification image 38SH200g. With such a configuration, the related display can be suitably displayed.

  In the example illustrated in FIGS. 20-43, when the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the error notification image 38SH200g are displayed in parallel, the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the error notification image 38SH200g are superimposed without being changed. However, one or both of the shapes may be deformed or the display position may be changed for display. For example, when related displays having a circular shape similar to each other, such as the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the operation instruction image 38SH200d, may be changed to a rectangular shape. However, either or both display positions may be changed so that they do not overlap. By doing in this way, it can make it easy to recognize.

  20-43 shows an example in which the error notification image 38SH200g is superimposed and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the images shown in FIGS. 20-38 to 20-42 are superimposed and displayed. You may do it. For example, the jog dial image 204 may be superimposed and displayed on the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 20-43, and it may be allowed to display three or more images superimposed on each other. For example, when an error occurs when the jog dial image 204 is displayed superimposed on the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a, the error notification image 38SH200g is displayed superimposed on the right-handed instruction image 38SH200a and the jog dial image 204. You may do it. When a plurality of images are superimposed and displayed, they are displayed in a superimposed manner according to a predetermined display priority (for example, the error notification image 38SH200g having a high priority as notification content has a high display priority. May be set and displayed on the upper layer), or the display priority may be increased in the order of shorter display time (that is, an image with a shorter display time is displayed on the upper layer). The display priority may be increased in the order in which it is displayed most recently (that is, an image to be displayed later is displayed in a higher hierarchy), or the display priority is increased in the order of decreasing display size (that is, Alternatively, an image with a small display size may be displayed on a higher layer so as to overlap a large image).

(Additional notes regarding feature 38SH (63IW))
(1) A gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine that performs a game, and display means (for example, an effect commentary image 38SH200c or an effect commentary image 38SH200e) that can display a related display relating to a predetermined state The image display device 5) is provided, and the display means can display a related display formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions (for example, an effect explanation image 38SH200c configured in a manner including a zigzag arrow-shaped region, The presentation commentary image 38SH200e configured in a manner including an area extending in the vertical direction and an area extending in the horizontal direction (strictly, an area depicted on a plane that seems to extend in the horizontal direction), etc. −40, see FIG. 20-41)

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be effectively displayed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  (2) A gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine that performs a game, and displays a related display related to a predetermined state (for example, a right-handed instruction image 38SH200a, a left-handed instruction image 38SH200b, and an operation instruction image 38SH200d). The display means is capable of displaying a related display formed in a curved shape (see, for example, FIGS. 20-38, 20-39, and 20-42).

  According to such a configuration, the related display can be effectively displayed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Explanation 1 regarding the feature part 38SH and the feature part 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a display unit, and the display unit is formed to extend in a plurality of directions and has a predetermined state. The related display and the specific display can be displayed, and the content of the related display can be recognized even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display.

(Explanation 2 regarding the feature part 38SH and the feature part 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 38SH and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a display unit, and the display unit is formed in a curved shape and related to a predetermined state. The related display and the specific display can be displayed, and the content of the related display can be recognized even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display.

(Explanation 1 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW))
A gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and includes a display unit and an operable movable body. A related display related to a predetermined state can be displayed in a predetermined display area, and the movable body can be operated at an operation position overlapping at least the predetermined display area. The contents of the related display can be recognized even when the movable body is in the operating position.

(Explanation 2 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 38SH (39SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and includes a display means and an operable movable body. The related display formed in a curved shape and related to a predetermined state can be displayed in a predetermined display area, and the movable body can be operated at an operation position at least overlapping with the predetermined display area. Even when the movable body is in the operating position, the contents of the related display can be recognized.

(Explanation 1 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW))
A gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and includes first display means and second display means, and includes first display means. And the second display means are formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions, and a related display related to a predetermined state can be displayed.

(Explanation 2 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (40SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH) and the characteristic portion 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and includes a first display means and a second display means. A related display that is formed in a curved line and related to a predetermined state can be displayed across the display means and the second display means.

(Explanation 1 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and changes common to the display means and the plurality of displays displayed on the display means. Specific display means for executing a specific effect to be provided, and the display means is formed to extend in a plurality of directions and can display related displays related to a predetermined state, and receives a change due to the specific effects as the related display. The first related display and the second related display that is not affected by the specific effect can be displayed.

(Explanation 2 regarding the feature 38SH (41SH) and the feature 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 38SH (41SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and is common to the display means and a plurality of displays displayed on the display means. Specific display means for executing a specific effect that gives a change, and the display means is capable of displaying a related display that is formed in a curved line and related to a predetermined state, and receives a change due to the specific effect as the related display. The related display and the second related display that is not affected by the specific effect can be displayed.

(Explanation 1 regarding the characteristic part 38SH (42SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 38SH (42SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and changes common to the display means and the plurality of displays displayed on the display means. Specific display means for executing a specific effect to be given, and the display means is capable of displaying a related display related to a predetermined state formed so as to extend in a plurality of directions in an aspect accompanied by an operation. Even when the specific effect is changed by execution, it can be displayed in a mode with an action.

(Explanation 2 regarding the feature 38SH (42SH) and the feature 38SH (63IW))
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 38SH (42SH) and the characteristic part 38SH (63IW) is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and is common to the display means and a plurality of displays displayed on the display means. Specific display means for executing a specific effect that gives a change, and the display means is capable of displaying a related display that is formed in a curved line and related to a predetermined state in a mode involving an operation. Even when it is changed by executing, it is possible to display in a mode accompanied by an operation.

(Explanation 1 regarding the characteristic part 95AK)
Next, the feature part 95AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 95AK is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a specific display executing means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, and an advantageous state Suggesting effect executing means capable of executing an suggesting effect that suggests being controlled. The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects with different ratios controlled to the advantageous state. An expectation suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the ratio controlled to the advantageous state by the execution of the suggestion effect by displaying an expectation suggestion display. The expectation suggestion effect execution means can execute an expectation suggestion effect that changes the display mode of the expectation suggestion display by the specific display acting on the expectation suggestion display. The specific display in the feature portion 95AK is a variable display compatible display (corresponding display) such as a hold display corresponding to variable display or an active display, and may indicate a display different from the specific display in other feature portions.

(Example 1 of the rendering operation related to the characteristic portion 95AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the characteristic portion 95AK of the present embodiment will be described. Each effect operation in the feature portion 95AK is realized by the effect control CPU 120 controlling an effect device such as the image display device 5 based on the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect content in the effect control process. FIG. 21A shows an example of an effect operation related to the feature portion 95AK. In the characteristic portion 95AK, the active indication as the specific display acts on the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is improved is executed. Instead of or in addition to the expectation degree suggestion display and the expectation degree suggestion effect in the feature portion 31AK, the expectation degree suggestion effect of the feature portion 95AK may be executed. A description of portions common to the characteristic portion 31AK is omitted. In this embodiment, an example in which the specific display is an active display will be described. However, the specific display may be a hold display. In other words, the active display can be appropriately replaced with the hold display.

  FIG. 21A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. A corresponding display area 95AK010 for displaying a corresponding display (variable display corresponding display) is formed in the lower part of the image display device 5. The corresponding display area 95AK010 includes a first hold display area 95AK011, a second hold display area 95AK012, and an active display area 95AK013.

  The first hold display area 95AK011 is an area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the first special figure game (a hold display indicating the first hold memory number). Second hold display area 95AK012, a hold display corresponding to the second special figure game (an area for displaying a hold display indicating the first hold memory number. The active display area 95AK013 is an area for displaying an active display. It is.

  In the first hold display area 95AK011, four circular hold displays can be displayed corresponding to the upper limit number of the first hold storage number, and the hold display number 1 from the right in the winning order (the order of digestion is fast) The hold display of display number 2, hold display number 3, and hold display number 4 is displayed. Each time the variable display ends, the hold display with the largest hold display number displayed in the first hold display area 95AK011 is erased, and each hold display is shifted to the position of the hold display number one smaller or the active display area 95AK013. To do. In FIG. 21A, the first hold storage number is 3, and three hold displays up to hold display number 3 are displayed in the first hold display area 95AK011. In FIG. 21-1 (A), a white hold display is displayed in all cases, but when a notice for changing the display mode of the hold display is being executed, the corresponding hold display is displayed in another color or other It may be displayed in a shape.

  In the second hold display area 95AK012, four circular hold displays can be displayed corresponding to the upper limit number of the second hold memory number, and the hold display number 1 from the left in the winning order (the fastest digestion order), the hold The hold display of display number 2, hold display number 3, and hold display number 4 is displayed. In FIG. 21A, the second reserved storage number is 0, and no hold display is displayed in the second hold display area 95AK012.

  In the active display area 95AK013, one active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed. Each time the variable display is finished, the active display displayed in the active display area 95AK013 is erased, and when there is a hold display, the hold display displayed in the hold display number 1 is shifted so that the active display area is displayed. The active display is displayed again at 95AK013. When the advance notice for changing the display mode of the active display is executed, the active display is displayed in a mode different in color and shape from the normal mode (for example, the same white circular display as the hold display). Note that the normal display mode (shape and size) of the active display may be the same as the hold display, or the shape and size may be different.

  In FIG. 21A, a black star active display 95AK001 is displayed in the active display area 95AK013. The normal display mode of the active display is the same white circular display as the hold display. When the expectation suggestion effect of the characteristic portion 95AK is executed, the display mode changes to a black star-shaped special mode at the start of variable display (when the hold display is shifted to the active display). ing. The timing at which the display mode changes is not limited to this as long as it is a timing before the expectation suggestion effect is executed, and may be any timing.

  After that, for example, the decorative symbol indicating the numeral 7 on the “left” and “right” stops and becomes a reach form, and becomes a super reach D as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21-1 (B), the Super Reach D title 95AK021 (here, the letters “SP Reach D”) is displayed on a part of the center of the image display device 5, and the reach of the reach from the speaker 8 is also increased. By outputting a sound corresponding to the title name (here, “defeat the enemy”), the title of Super Reach D is notified. Further, below the title 95AK021, an expectation suggestion display 95AK022 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. Here, the degree of expectation is an index indicating the degree of expectation that will be a big hit, but it may not completely coincide with the big hit reliability of reach.

  In FIG. 21-1 (B), five white star expectation indications 95AK022 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-1 (C), a black star 95AK003 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 95AK022 is displayed. At this time, the active display 95AK001 is enlarged to a size larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 95AK022, moves so as to drift on the screen, and stops on the right side of the screen.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21-1 (D), an effect is performed in which the black star 95AK003 moves and falls within one of the white stars of the expectation suggestion display 95AK022. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. Note that the audio output is not essential and may not be output. As shown in FIGS. 21-1 (E) and (F), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars).

  The example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 21A has the features described in FIG. 12 and the like except that there is a corresponding display area 95AK010 and the expectation suggestion effect of the feature unit 95AK described below is executed. This is the same as the operation example of the expectation suggestion effect of the unit 31AK. In the expectation degree suggestion effect of the feature portion 31AK shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended at this stage. As shown in FIG. -1 (G), the active display 95AK001 moves (acts) to produce an effect that fits in one of the white stars on the expectation suggestion display 95AK022. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased.

  In the embodiment and the present embodiment, it is expressed that the effect such as active display moves to the effect indicating the expectation suggestion and collides and interferes.

  Note that the sound output when the active display acts on the expectation suggestion display is different from the sound (FIGS. 21-1 (D) and (F)) output when other star images act. May be.

  Thereafter, when the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 95AK022 (the stage where the active display is finished), the black star shines as shown in FIG. And so on. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  As described above, the expectation level suggestion effect of the feature portion 95AK is a chance-up effect that further improves the expectation level of the super reach suggested by the expectation level indication effect of the feature portion 31AK (FIGS. 12A to 12E). It has become. By executing such an effect, the effect of the effect is improved and the interest of the game is improved. Moreover, since the active display (specific display) acts on the expectation suggestion display and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is improved, an unexpected effect can be executed. Whether or not to execute an effect that increases the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display by causing the active display (specific display) to act on the expectation suggestion display as a chance-up effect is, for example, executing super reach In the case of the corresponding variation pattern, it may be determined on the side of the effect control board 12 based on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Therefore, even in the case of Super Reach D, when it is determined not to execute an effect that increases the degree of expectation, the number of black stars on the degree of expectation indication is two. If the number of black stars on the expectation suggestion display is the same when the effect that increases the degree of expectation is executed and when it is not executed, the effect that increases the expectation (chance up) The probability (hit reliability) that the jackpot is greater when the performance) is executed may be increased. For example, the super reach D in which the chance up effect is executed may have a higher hit reliability than the super reach C in which the chance up effect is not executed. By doing in this way, even if the low-expectation reach is started, the player expects that a chance-up effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

  Note that the expectation level indicated by the expectation level indication may be improved and the reach title may be changed to a reach title corresponding to a reach with a higher expectation level. That is, the development effect that the reach is developed (promoted) may be executed by the active display (specific display) acting on the expectation suggestion display. In addition, after performing the expectation suggestion effect of the feature 31AK (between FIGS. 21-1 (F) and (G)), the expectation is determined by performing highlighting such that a black star once shines. You may show it to. By doing in this way, it can be emphasized that the chance has been increased by the expectation suggestion effect of the characteristic portion 95AK, and the effect of the effect is improved.

(Production operation example 2 regarding the characteristic portion 95AK)
FIG. 21-2 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 95AK. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  In this example, the black star 95AK003 is displayed, and the effect that the black star 95AK003 moves and falls within one of the white stars of the expectation suggestion display 95AK022 is omitted, and FIGS. 21-2 (A) and (B) As shown in FIG. 21A, after the presentation operation similar to FIGS. 21A and 21B, the active display 95AK001 moves so as to float on the screen as shown in FIG. Stopping on the right side, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (D), the active display 95AK001 acts to produce an effect that falls within the white stars of the expectation suggestion display 95AK022. At this time, the number of black stars on the expectation level suggestion display 95AK022 is increased to three, and a sound “pin pin pin” indicating that three black stars indicating the degree of expectation are increased from the speaker 8 is output. Thus, by outputting the voice “pin” three times, it becomes easy to grasp the number of stages where the degree of expectation has increased. Note that the tone of the sound may be changed step by step when the sound “pin” is output three times. Further, the same sound (“pin”) as in other cases may be output. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (E), the black star is highlighted so that it shines.

  The degree-of-expectation suggestion effect such as the effect operation example 2 may be executed alternatively to, for example, the degree-of-expectation suggestion effects shown in FIGS. For example, any expectation suggestion effect may be executed according to an actual variable display result or the like. When the expectation suggestion effect in which the active display acts on the expectation suggestion display is performed as compared with the case where the normal expectation suggestion effect is executed for the expectation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. Since the higher expectation is suggested, the player comes to pay attention to whether the active indication acts on the expectation suggestion effect or the active indication changes to a special mode. , The player's expectation can be improved.

  As described above, in the feature portion 95AK, when the expectation suggestion effect in which the active display affects the expectation suggestion display is executed, the active display is the same display as the display indicating the expectation in the expectation suggestion display. It changes to a black star-shaped special aspect. As a result, when the active display changes to a black star-shaped special aspect, the expectation suggestion effect is executed, and before that, the reach that indicates the expectation level (superreach) is indicated and suggested. be able to. Therefore, the player comes to pay attention to whether the active display changes to a special mode, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, although the active display has changed to a black star-shaped special aspect, there may be a case where the expectation suggestion effect and the super reach are not executed. Further, the active display may be changed to a special mode other than the black star shape. In this case, the execution rate of the degree of expectation suggestion and the super reach differs between the black star shape and the other special modes (for example, The execution rate may be higher for the black star type).

(Modification of the characteristic part 95AK)
Note that the feature portion 95AK is not limited to that described here, and various modifications and applications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Further, the feature of the feature portion 31AK described in the above embodiment may be adopted as appropriate for the feature portion 95AK.

  In the expectation suggestion effect of the present embodiment, after the specific display (active display) changes to a special mode, the active display moves from the active display area 95AK013, and then acts on the expectation suggestion display. However, the specific display (active display, hold display) may act on the expectation suggestion display without changing to the special mode, or the specific display may be changed to the expectation suggestion display without moving from the corresponding display area 95AK010. You may make it act.

  In addition, when performing an expectation suggestion effect that causes the hold display to act on the expectation suggestion display as the specific display, a plurality of specific displays (multiple hold display, hold display and active display, etc.) act on the expectation suggestion display. An expectation suggestion effect may be executed. When changing the specific display to a special mode and then acting on the expectation level suggestion display, it is possible to suggest that the expectation level will increase when a plurality of specific displays change to the special mode. Will improve. In addition, it is possible to easily change to a special mode as the number of held displays increases. In this case, the player's game can be promoted, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. When a plurality of specific displays act on the expectation level suggestion display, the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display may or may not increase. A plurality of special modes in which the specific display changes may be provided, and the rate at which the degree of expectation indicated by the degree of expectation display increases depending on which special mode is used. It should be noted that the expectation suggestion effect of the present embodiment and the modification only needs to be executed with a ratio or an effect pattern that can preferably indicate the expectation level that is a big hit, based on whether the actual variable display result is a big hit, etc. The presence / absence of the expectation suggestion effect and the effect pattern may be determined.

  In addition, the method of causing the specific display to act on the expectation suggestion display is not limited to the specific display directly acting on the expectation suggestion display as in the present embodiment, and other effect images ( For example, a star image or a bullet may act. In this case, an effect in which the effect image acts a plurality of times from one specific display to the expectation suggestion display may be executed. By doing in this way, even after the effect image has acted once on the expectation suggestion display, the player can expect that the effect image further acts to improve the expectation, so the interest of the game is improved. .

  For example, the specific display (active display, hold display) may be changed to an image of two or more stars or half stars, and the display may act on the expectation suggestion display. Further, the specific display may change to a special mode other than the star shape, or the active display may act on the expectation suggestion display without changing. In this case, the sound output at that time may vary depending on the type and number of active displays (specific display) that act. Further, the same sound may be output regardless of the type and number of active displays (specific display) that act. The sound may be changed stepwise depending on the number of active displays (specific display) that act.

  In addition, the production mode before the active display (specific display) acts on the expectation-indicating display is not limited to the display mode that stops after the active display drifts as in the present embodiment, and as a result, the active display Any display may be used as long as it acts on the expectation indication. For example, you may make it rock | fluctuate on a screen or move around (it keeps drifting) until an active display acts. Furthermore, when the active display drifts, the display is displayed in a size larger than the star image in the expectation suggestion display, but the display size may be arbitrary.

  Further, for example, an expectation suggestion effect may be executed such that a specific display (active display, hold display) acts to reduce the expectation suggestion display step by step. Further, the super-reach title notification may be performed when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super-reach reach effect.

  Further, when executing the expectation suggestion effect, the corresponding display area 95AK010 may be deleted and only the specific display may be left. By doing in this way, it becomes easy to pay attention to the expectation suggestion effect. In this case, the corresponding display area 95AK010 may be redisplayed after the expectation suggestion effect is completed.

  Even after the super-reach title is notified, for example, as shown in FIGS. 9I and 9J, when the title and the expectation suggestion display are continuously displayed, the specific display acts on the expectation suggestion display. You may make it perform the expectation degree suggestion effect of 95AK.

  When the specific display (active display, hold display) changes to a special mode, the player is prompted to operate the operation means that can be operated by the player, such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and the specific mode is displayed when the operation is detected. You may make it change to. When an operation is not detected, it may be changed to a special mode over time, or an expectation suggesting effect that causes a specific display to operate may not be executed. When the expectation suggestion effect that causes the specific display to be performed is not executed, the player's operation can be prompted, and the effect of the effect is improved.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 95AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 95AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and supports variable display. Specific display executing means (for example, the corresponding display area 95AK010) capable of displaying the specified display (for example, active display, hold display), and a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed. Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120), and the suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different ratios controlled to the advantageous state (for example, super reach A to E). Reach effect), and the percentage controlled to the advantageous state due to the execution of the suggestion effect is indicated by displaying the expectation suggestion display Expectation level suggesting effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute the expected level suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9 (H) to (J), FIGS. 12, 21-1, and 21-2). The expectation suggestion effect execution means can execute the expectation suggestion effect that changes the display mode of the expectation suggestion display by the specific display acting on the expectation suggestion display (for example, FIG. 21-1). , FIG. 21-2).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the expectation suggestion effect executing means stepwise outputs a predetermined number of specific images according to a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by the suggestion effect being executed. It is possible to display the expectation suggestion display by displaying and to output a sound corresponding to the display of the specific image (for example, FIGS. 12, 21-1, and 21-2).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (2), the expectation suggestion effect executing means can suggest a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by the number of specific images to be displayed, and the first predetermined number of specific images The same sound may be output when is displayed and when the second predetermined number of specific images are displayed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(4) In the gaming machine of the above (2), the expectation suggestion effect executing means can suggest a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by the number of specific images to be displayed, and a first predetermined number of specific images Different sounds may be output when is displayed and when the second predetermined number of specific images are displayed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), the sound to be output may be changed stepwise depending on the number of the specific images displayed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(6) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), the expectation suggestion effect executing means displays the specific image in a predetermined size, and then displays the specific image in a predetermined display area. You may be made to be able to perform the said expectation degree suggestion production to move (for example, FIGS. 12 (B)-(E), (H)-(K), FIGS. 21-1, 21-2)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(7) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (6), the expectation suggestion effect executing means is a predetermined number according to a ratio controlled to the advantageous state by executing the suggestion effect. The expectation suggestion effect may be executed by reducing and displaying the specific images.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7), further comprising: a title notification unit (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of reporting a title corresponding to the suggestion effect, The title corresponding to the suggestion effect may be notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). )).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(Description 1 regarding the feature 96AK)
Next, the feature part 96AK of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 96AK is a gaming machine that can execute a game, and includes a display unit that performs display and a display control unit that performs control to display an image on the display unit. The display control means can display the first image and the second image as images relating to the progress of the game on the display means, and can display a predetermined image and a pseudo-object image as an effect image on the display means. is there. In the display control means, the priority order of the display means is higher in the first image than in the predetermined image, higher in the pseudo-object image than in the first image, and higher in the second image than the pseudo-object image. Those images can be displayed as follows. The display control means can display the pseudo-functional object image so as to pass on the first image and not pass on the second image.

(Example 1 of production operation related to the feature 96AK)
Next, an example of the rendering operation of the feature portion 96AK of the present embodiment will be described. Each effect operation in the feature portion 96AK is realized by the effect control CPU 120 controlling the effect device such as the image display device 5 based on the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect content in the effect control process. In the feature portion 96AK, the first image and the second image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed on the image display device 5, and a predetermined image and a pseudo-object image can be displayed as an effect image. Then, control is performed so that the display priority order in the image display device 5 is “predetermined image <first image <pseudo-object image <second image”. When the display positions in the image display device 5 overlap, control is performed so that an image with a higher priority is displayed on the near side. For example, when displaying each image divided into a plurality of layers, an image with a higher priority may be displayed on the upper layer. Further, the pseudo-object image can be displayed so as to pass through the first image and not through the second image. By doing in this way, while ensuring the visibility of the second image with high importance, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the pseudo-instantial image look like an actual accessory.

  In the present embodiment, the first image is a hold display, an active display, or a decorative pattern. The second image is the fourth symbol. In addition, the predetermined image is a background image, a character image of a notice effect or a reach effect, a decorative pattern, and a corresponding display area, and the pseudo-object image is an image imitating an object (movable object, structure). Since the decorative symbol is an image relating to the progress of the game and an effect image, it may be classified as either the first image or the predetermined image. Further, the corresponding display area (holding display area, active display area) may be classified into the first image. For example, a movable object used for production may be used as the base of the pseudo-object image, or a structure used as a decorative member of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be used.

  FIG. 21C illustrates an example of the effect operation related to the feature portion 96AK. In the image display device 5 of the feature 96AK, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (A), the fourth symbol display area for displaying the fourth symbol for the first special symbol as the fourth symbol display area. 96AK001 and a fourth symbol display area 96AK002 for displaying a fourth symbol for the second special symbol are provided. The fourth symbol is a fourth symbol after the decorative symbol, the special symbol, and the normal symbol, and is a symbol that performs variable display in synchronization with variable display of the special symbol. Here, the synchronization means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same, and the variable display periods coincide.

  The fourth symbol display area 96AK001 and the fourth symbol display area 96AK002 (fourth symbol) are provided in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-3 (A), and the background image 96AK014, the notice effect. Even when the display priority is higher than the character image and the decorative design of the reach effect and the variable display of the decorative design is executed, or when various effects are executed on the image display device 5, The display state of the 4th symbol is always possible. Whether special symbols or decorative designs are poorly visible and it is difficult to confirm whether special symbols are being variably displayed or not, whether or not special symbols are being variably displayed by ensuring the visibility of the 4th symbol Can be confirmed by the player. Since it is important to ensure visibility in this way, the 4th symbol is the second image with the highest display priority.

  In the fourth symbol display area 96AK001 for the first special symbol, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the display and non-display of the fourth symbol of the predetermined display color are repeated (flashing). The variable display of the 4th symbol is executed. In the 4th symbol display area for the 1st special symbol, when the variable display of the 1st special symbol is not executed, the 4th symbol of the predetermined display color is always in the display state, and the variable display of the 4th symbol is also stopped. .

  In the 4th symbol display area 96AK002 for the 2nd special symbol, when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed, the display and non-display of the 4th symbol having a display color different from that for the 1st symbol are repeated ( The fourth symbol variable display is executed by blinking). In the 4th symbol display area for the 2nd special symbol, when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is not executed, the 4th symbol of the display color different from that for the 1st symbol is always displayed, and the 4th symbol of the 4th symbol is displayed. Variable display is also stopped.

  FIG. 21-3 (A) shows that the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. In the lower part of the image display device 5, a corresponding display area 96AK010 for displaying a corresponding display (variable display corresponding display) is formed. The corresponding display area 96AK010 includes a first hold display area 96AK011, a second hold display area 96AK012, and an active display area 96AK013.

  The first hold display area 96AK011 is an area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the first special figure game (a hold display indicating the first hold memory number). Second hold display area 96AK012, a hold display corresponding to the second special figure game (an area for displaying a hold display indicating the first hold memory number. The active display area 96AK013 is an area for displaying an active display. It is.

  In the first hold display area 96AK011, four circular hold displays can be displayed corresponding to the upper limit number of the first hold storage number, and the hold display number 1 from the right in the winning order (the fastest digestion order), the hold The hold display of display number 2, hold display number 3, and hold display number 4 is displayed. Each time the variable display is finished, the hold display with the largest hold display number displayed in the first hold display area 96AK011 is erased, and each hold display is shifted to the position of the hold display number one smaller or the active display area 96AK013. To do. In FIG. 21-3 (A), the first reserved storage number is 3, and three hold displays up to hold display number 3 are displayed in the first hold display area 96AK011. In FIG. 21-3 (A), an all-white hold display is displayed, but when a notice for changing the display mode of the hold display is being executed, the corresponding hold display is displayed in another color or other It may be displayed in a shape.

  In the second hold display area 96AK012, four circular hold displays can be displayed corresponding to the upper limit number of the second hold storage number, and the hold display number 1 from the left in the winning order (the fastest digestion order), the hold The hold display of display number 2, hold display number 3, and hold display number 4 is displayed. In FIG. 21-3 (A), the second reserved storage number is 0, and no hold display is displayed in the second hold display area 96AK012.

  In the active display area 96AK013, one active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed. Each time the variable display is finished, the active display displayed in the active display area 96AK013 is erased, and when there is a hold display, the hold display displayed in the hold display number 1 is shifted so that the active display area is displayed. The active display is displayed again on 96AK013. When the advance notice for changing the display mode of the active display is executed, the active display is displayed in a mode different in color and shape from the normal mode (for example, the same white circular display as the hold display). Note that the normal display mode (shape and size) of the active display may be the same as the hold display, or the shape and size may be different. In FIG. 21-3 (A), a white circular active display is displayed in the active display area 95AK013. The hold display and the active display are the first images having a low display priority.

  Here, in the case of executing the notice effect for displaying the pseudo-functional object image on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), the front side of the background image 96AK014 from the left end portion of the image display device 5 The pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 is displayed. At this time, the pseudo-character image 96AK020 is displayed so that it can be seen from the left end portion of the image display device 5, and the pseudo-character image 96AK020 moves in the right direction. In the stage shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), only a part of the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 is displayed. By doing in this way, it can be made to appear as if the real character appeared from the left side direction of the image display device 5, and the effect of production is improved. In addition, a structure such as a cover or a guide is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 is installed on the back side of the game board 2 so that the depth direction is three-dimensional (the actual role is It is possible to make it appear as if an accessory has appeared from the left direction of the image display device 5, and make it appear as if an actual accessory has appeared from the left direction of the image display device 5. it can. Further, a 3D image may be displayed in order to enhance the stereoscopic effect of the pseudo-object image 96AK020.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21C, the entire pseudo-object image 96AK020 is displayed by moving the pseudo-object image 96AK020 in the right direction. At this time, the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 is displayed (preferentially) on the front side of the background image 96AK014, the hold display (first hold display area 96AK011) and the decorative design. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the pseudo-object image 96AK020 is a real object (movable object) moving on the front side of the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 21-3 (C), the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 is composed of a main member image 96AK021 that simulates an accessory and a shaft member image 96AK022 that simulates a shaft that supports the accessory. By displaying the shaft member image 96AK022 in this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the actual accessory is operating. It should be noted that the main member image 96AK021 may perform an operation such as rotation in accordance with the rightward movement of the pseudo object image 96AK020. In addition, the main member image 96AK021 may be displayed so as to include a lamp, and an effect that the lamp is turned on may be performed. Further, a vibration motor is provided in the effect member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is vibrated in accordance with the rightward movement of the pseudo-object image 96AK020, or from the speaker 8. You may vibrate by outputting a heavy bass. By doing in this way, the production effect can be enhanced.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 21-3 (D) to (F), the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 includes a background image 96AK014, a hold display and an active display (second hold display area 96AK012, active display area 96AK013) and a decorative pattern. The image moves to the right while being displayed on the near side, and disappears so as to be completely visible on the right side of the image display device 5 in the same manner as when it appeared. Also on the right side of the image display device 5, it may be emphasized that an actual accessory appears to disappear on the right side of the image display device 5 by making the depth direction three-dimensional by providing a structure or the like. .

  As shown in FIG. 21-3 (F), the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 does not pass above (front side) the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area 96AK001 and the fourth symbol display area 96AK002. It has become. If the pseudo character image 96AK020 on the fourth symbol, which is the second image having the highest display priority, passes, the fourth symbol is displayed on the pseudo character image 96AK020, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. And the stereoscopic effect of the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 is impaired. Therefore, by preventing the pseudo-character image 96AK020 from passing over the 4th symbol, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the pseudo-character image 96AK020 look like a real character while preventing such inconvenience. .

(Example 2 of production operations relating to the feature 96AK)
Subsequently, another example of the rendering operation of the characteristic portion 96AK of the present embodiment will be described. In another example of the rendering operation of the characteristic portion 96AK shown in FIG. 21-4, a sub-image display device 96AK004 is provided adjacent to the image display device 5. The sub-image display device 96AK004 is composed of an LCD, an organic EL, or the like, and can display various effect images under the control of the effect control CPU 120. In this example, the sub image display device 96AK004 is installed so as to be inclined with respect to the player side.

  In this effect operation example, the fourth symbol display area 96AK001 and the fourth symbol display area 96AK002 are provided in the sub-image display device 96AK004. As described above, since the fourth symbol is displayed on the sub-image display device 96AK004 independent of the image display device 5 on which the decorative display variable display and reach effect production operations are performed, the execution status of the variable display can be determined by the player. Will be easier to grasp.

  Some effect images may be displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 96AK004. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-4, a character image 96AK003, which is a predetermined image for an effect such as a notice effect, is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 96AK004. Yes. On the other hand, the pseudo-object image 96AK020 is displayed in the image display device 5, and is not displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 96AK004. Even if the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 96AK004 are installed adjacent to each other, the continuity of the image is cut off because there is a frame or a step in the joint portion. Therefore, as shown in this display operation example, the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 imitating the real real object is not displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 96AK004, thereby realizing the pseudo-character. It is possible to prevent the continuity of the object image 96AK020 from being cut off, giving the image a sense of incongruity, making it invisible as a real object, and eliminating the stereoscopic effect of the image.

Further, since the sub image display device 96AK004 is inclined toward the player side, displaying the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 here gives the player an uncomfortable feeling that the image looks distorted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by not displaying the pseudo-object image 96AK020 on the sub-image display device 96AK004 inclined toward the player. It should be noted that by adjusting the appearance of the pseudo-object image 96AK020 according to the inclination angle with respect to the player side (the display angle of the three-dimensional surface, etc.), the pseudo-object image 96AK020 is displayed on a tilted screen while preventing the occurrence of discomfort. May also be displayed. However, since the pseudo-object image 96AK020 is displayed only on the screen that is not inclined, it is not necessary to make such adjustment, so that the control burden can be reduced.

(Example 3 of production operations relating to the feature 96AK)
As in another example of the production operation of the characteristic portion 96AK shown in FIG. 21-5, the error notification image 96AK005 for notifying that an error has occurred is displayed on the near side with priority over the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020. . By doing in this way, an error can be suitably notified to a player.

  Depending on the type of error that has occurred, it may be determined whether the error notification image 96AK005 is displayed with priority over the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020. For example, the error notification image 96AK005 is displayed with priority over the pseudo-character image 96AK020 for a serious error such as a magnetic error or an illegal prize error, while the pseudo-character is used for an error capable of continuing the game such as an operation error of the effect device. The image 96AK020 may be displayed with priority over the error notification image 96AK005. By doing in this way, the effect by the pseudo | simulator character image 96AK020 can be performed suitably, performing the error alert | report suitably.

(Example 4 of production operations related to the feature 96AK)
In addition to the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020, an effect using a real actual object may be executed. FIG. 21-6 shows another example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 96AK in the case of executing the effect using an actual accessory. In this example, differences from the above-described example will be described in detail, and detailed description of common configurations will be omitted.

  When executing a notice effect for operating the accessory, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), during the variable display of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), the image display device 5 The effect role 96AK060 stored on the left side appears and moves the front side of the image display device 5 in the right direction. In the stage shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), the left part of the accessory 96AK060 is covered with the front cover and the game board 2, and only the right part of the accessory 96AK060 is visible.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (C), the entire accessory 96AK060 becomes visible by moving the accessory 96AK060 in the right direction. At this time, since the accessory 96AK060 is moving in front of the image display device 5, the accessory 96AK060 is in front of the holding display (first holding display area 96AK011) and the decorative pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 21-6 (C), the accessory 96AK060 is composed of a main member 96AK061 that imitates an accessory and a shaft member 96AK062 that supports the accessory, like the pseudo-object image 96AK020. The main member 96AK061 may perform operations such as rotation in accordance with the movement of the accessory 96AK060 in the right direction. Further, the main member 96AK061 may be configured to include a lamp, and an effect may be performed such that the lamp is lit. Further, in accordance with the operation of the accessory 96AK060, a vibration operation such as a vibration by a vibration motor or a vibration by a heavy bass output may be performed. By doing so, the production effect is improved.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 21-6 (D) to (F), the accessory 96AK060 moves the front side of the image display device 5 to the right side, and the right side of the image display device 5 as in the appearance. It disappears so that it can be overlooked.

  In this way, in the feature portion 96AK, the effect of displaying the pseudo-instantaneous object image 96AK020 that imitates the real accessory 96AK060 is executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in the case where an effect in which the real accessory 96AK060 is operated, the effect of displaying the pseudo-object image 96AK020 may not be executed. For example, alternatively, any one of the effects may be executed, and the jackpot reliability may be different when each effect is executed. In addition, when an effect using the accessory 96AK060 is being executed, such as when the action of the accessory 96AK060 is stopped but stopped at the advance position, the effect of displaying the pseudo-object image 96AK020 is not executed. Also good. In addition, an effect of operating the real accessory 96AK060 is usually executed, but when the defect of the accessory 96AK060 occurs, an effect using the pseudo-instantaneous image 96AK020 may be executed as an alternative effect. It should be noted that an effect in which the real accessory 96AK060 operates and an effect in which the pseudo-object image 96AK020 is displayed may be executed simultaneously.

  The pseudo-instantial image 96AK020 is configured to perform a display operation similar to the operation of the accessory 96AK060, but the pseudo-article image is an image imitating the accessory but executes different rendering operations. There may be. Moreover, although the accessory is provided in any place of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it may be an accessory that does not operate.

(Modification of the feature 96AK)
The feature 96AK is not limited to that described here, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the first image is a hold display, an active display, and a decorative pattern, but the first image may be an image that does not have to be visible at all times among images related to the progress of the game. For example, the first image may be a display indicating a gaming state, a display indicating that a big hit is being made, a table of a big hit round, a reach title and an expectation display, and the like. Further, the first image may be a related display (such as a telop image excluding an error telop image) of the characteristic portion 38SH. In other words, the pseudo-object image may be displayed with priority over the related display (such as a telop image excluding an error telop image) of the feature 38SH.

  In the present embodiment, the second image is the fourth symbol, but the second image may be any image that is desirably visible at all times among the images related to the progress of the game. For example, the second image may be a small design corresponding to the changing decorative design, a right-handed instruction image, or the like.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined image is a background image, a character image for a notice effect or a reach effect, a decorative pattern, or a corresponding display area. However, an image for an effect other than a pseudo-object image may be a predetermined image. Good. Further, the predetermined image may be a display related to the feature portion 38SH (such as a telop image excluding an error telop image).

  Further, in this embodiment, there is one type of pseudo-object image, but there may be a plurality of types of pseudo-object images imitating real objects. When a plurality of pseudo-object images are provided, a plurality of pseudo-object images may not be displayed at the same time or may not be displayed at overlapping positions. By doing in this way, it can prevent that a pseudo | simulated character image becomes difficult to be seen as an actual character. In addition, you may make it perform the production | generation which makes a some pseudo | simulation object image interlock | cooperate. For example, an effect may be executed in which a plurality of pseudo-character images are combined by causing the pseudo-character images to appear from different directions. By executing such an effect, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the member image simulating a member that supports a real accessory is not limited to the shaft member image, and may be an image of a rail, a frame, or the like. In addition, the member image may be a harness or wiring connected to an actual accessory. In this case, by displaying the harness or wiring so that the harness or wiring expands or contracts when the simulated object image is operated, the simulated object (member image) can be displayed more like a real thing. The effect is improved. The role that becomes the base of the pseudo-character image is not limited to the one that has a real character on the gaming machine, and may be a model of a well-known structure, character, or motif. It may be a model imitating an accessory used in the machine.

  In this embodiment, the sub-image display device 96AK004 is provided adjacent to the upper right portion of the image display device 5, but the installation position, the number of installations, and whether or not there is an inclination may be arbitrary. Further, the sub image display device 96AK004 may not be provided.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 96AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 96AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game, and a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying, and an image on the display means. Display control means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the display of the first image (eg, hold display, active display, decoration) as an image related to the progress of the game. A second image (for example, a fourth pattern, a small pattern, etc.) can be displayed, and a predetermined image (for example, a background image 96AK014, a notice effect or a reach effect character image) is displayed on the display means as an effect image. , Decorative pattern, corresponding display area 96AK010, etc.) and a pseudo-object image (for example, a pseudo-object image 96AK020) can be displayed. However, the first image is higher than the predetermined image, the pseudo-worker image is higher than the first image, and the second image is higher than the pseudo-worker image. It can be displayed, and the pseudo-object image can be displayed so as to pass on the first image and not pass on the second image (for example, FIG. 21-3).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the pseudo-object image may be displayed so as to be completely visible at the end of the display area of the display means (for example, FIG. 21-3 (B), ( F)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2), there are a plurality of display means (for example, the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 96AK004), and the predetermined image (for example, the character image 96AK003) is a plurality of the display items. The pseudo-object image may be displayed across a plurality of the display means while being displayed across the means.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), there are a plurality of the display means (for example, the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 96AK004). The pseudo-functional object image may be displayed on the display means that is not inclined (for example, the pseudo-functional object image 96AK020 is displayed on the image display device 5).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(5) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), the pseudo object image may include a pseudo member image (for example, a shaft member image 96AK022).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(6) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), it is possible to execute a vibration operation in accordance with the display operation of the pseudo-object image.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above includes an operable movable body (for example, an accessory 96AK060) so that the pseudo-object image is not displayed during the operation of the movable body. It may be.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in production effect.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7), an error display (for example, error notification image 96AK005) may be displayed with priority over the pseudo-object image (for example, FIG. 21). -5).
According to such a configuration, an error display can be appropriately displayed.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above includes an operable movable body (for example, an accessory 96AK060), and the pseudo-object image is an image imitating the movable object. (For example, FIGS. 21-3 and 21-6).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(10) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (9), the display means displays a related display related to a predetermined state (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 for notifying that a big hit effect is being executed) Etc.) and a specific display (for example, right-handed instruction image 38SH20) can be displayed, and even when the specific display is superimposed on the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized (for example, Even when the right-handed instruction image 38SH20 is displayed so as to overlap the telop image 38SH10, the contents of the telop image 38SH10 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH11 of the telop image 38SH10). Supplementary note (1) on the characteristic portion 38SH.
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above, including an operable movable body (for example, the movable body 32), wherein the display means displays a related display related to a predetermined state. It can be displayed in the display area (for example, the zone telop image 38SH30 notifying that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed can be displayed in the display area on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5). The movable body is operable at least in an operation position overlapping with the predetermined display area (for example, the movable body 32 is operable at least in front of the left display area where the zone telop image 38SH30 is displayed. Etc., even when the movable body is in the operating position during the display of the related display, the content of the related display can be recognized (for example, the zone telop image 38SH3). Even when the movable body 32 is in front of the display area on the left during the display of, the contents of the zone telop image 38SH30 can be recognized by moving the character information 38SH31 of the zone telop image 38SH30). (Note (1) regarding the feature 39SH).
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

(12) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (11), the first display means (for example, the image display device 5) and the second display means (for example, the sub-image display device 38SH5A) are provided. And a related display related to a predetermined state can be displayed across the first display means and the second display means (for example, the pre-read zone effect straddling the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 38SH5A). For example, displaying the zone telop image 38SH30 for informing that the process is being executed) (Appendix (1) regarding the feature 40SH).
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

(13) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (12), specific effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means. For example, a reduction effect that can reduce a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction rate, and the display means includes a related display (for example, a big hit) The jackpot telop image 38SH10 for notifying that the middle effect is being executed, the error telop image 38SH90 for notifying the abnormality that the lower plate is full, etc.) can be displayed. A first related display that receives a change (for example, a big hit telop image 38SH10 that receives a change due to a reduction effect) and a second function that does not receive a change due to the specific effect. Display (e.g., error telop image 38SH90 like not undergo changes due to reduced effect) may also be a can display and (Supplementary Note regarding features 41SH (1)).
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

(14) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (13), specific effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means. The display means can perform a reduction effect for reducing a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 at a common reduction ratio, and the display means performs an operation related display related to a predetermined state. It can be displayed in an accompanying mode (for example, displaying the big hit telop image 38SH10 informing that the big hit effect is being executed in a manner in which the character information 38SH11 is moved), Even when it is changed by the execution, it can be displayed in a mode with an action (for example, the character information 38SH11 is also displayed when the image blur effect is changed. MAY be like) is displayed in a manner that dynamic (Supplementary Note regarding features 42SH (1)).
According to such a structure, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

(Explanation for associating feature parts)
A part or all of the configurations related to the characteristic portions 95AK and 96AK may be combined as appropriate. In addition, each configuration related to the feature portions 95AK and 96AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions (31AK and 38SH). About the characteristic part combined in this way, or the individual characteristic part which is not combined, you may combine suitably a part or all of each structure regarding another characteristic part. For example, the configurations of the supplementary notes relating to the feature portion 95AK and the supplementary notes relating to the feature portion 95AK may be appropriately combined with some or all of the respective configurations relating to other feature portions.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Display means for displaying; and
Display control means for performing control to display an image on the display means,
The display control means includes
The display means can display a first image and a second image as images relating to the progress of the game,
The display means can display a predetermined image and a pseudo-object image as an effect image,
The priority order of the display means is higher in the first image than in the predetermined image, higher in the pseudo-object image than in the first image, and higher in the second image than the pseudo-object image. So that those images can be displayed and
The game machine, wherein the pseudo-instantaneous object image can be displayed so as to pass on the first image and not pass on the second image.